A000A01A-GAT

This Owner's Manual should be considered a part of the car and remain with it when it is sold for the use of the
next owner.

OWNER'S I.D.

ORIGINAL: NAME:
ADDRESS: STREET:
TOWN:
COUNTRY:
P.CODE:

DATE OF SALE:

SUBSEQUENT: NAME:
ADDRESS: STREET:
TOWN:
COUNTRY:
P.CODE:

TRANSFER DATE:
OWNER'S MANUAL

A030A01E-GAT
Operation
Maintenance HXDFL280-1
Specifications

All information in the Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. Hyundai reserves the right to make
changes at any time as part of our policy of continual product improvement may be carried out.

This manual applies to current Hyundai ELANTRA models and explanations of optional as well as standard
equipment are included. As a result, you may find material in this manual that does not apply to your specific
vehicle.

Please note that some ELANTRA models are equipped with Right-Hand Drive (RHD). The explanations and
illustrations for some operations in RHD models are opposite of those written in this manual.
A020A01A-AAT
RESPONSIBILITY FOR MAINTENANCE

The maintenance requirements for your new Hyundai are found in Section 5. As the
owner, it is your responsibility to see that all maintenance operations specified by the
manufacturer are carried out at the appropriate intervals. When the vehicle is used
in severe driving conditions, more frequent maintenance is required for some
operations. Maintenance requirements for severe operating conditions are also
included in Section 5.
A040A01A-AAT
FOREWORD

Thank you for choosing Hyundai. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of
discriminating people who drive Hyundais. The advanced engineering and high-quality construc-
tion of each Hyundai we build is something of which we're very proud.
Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new Hyundai. It is
suggested that you read it carefully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to
the satisfaction you receive from your new car.
The manufacturer also recommends that all service and maintenance on your car be performed
by an authorized Hyundai dealer. Hyundai dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service,
maintenance and any other assistance that may be required.

A050A05A-AAT
HYUNDAI MOTOR COMPANY

Note: Because future owners will also need the information included in this manual, if you sell this
Hyundai, please leave the manual in the vehicle for their use. Thank you.

! CAUTION:
Severe engine and transaxle damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and
lubricants that do not meet Hyundai specifications. You must always use high quality fuels
and lubricants that meet the specifications listed on Page 9-4 in the Vehicle Specifications
section of the Owner's Manual.

Copyright 2005 Hyundai Motor Company. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be
reproduced, stored in any retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the
prior written permission of Hyundai Motor Company.
A070A01A-GAT
! CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI

Modification of components may void the manufacturer's warranty

Your Hyundai should not be modified in any way. Modifications may adversely affect
the safety, durability and performance of your Hyundai. Components which are
subjected to modification or are added to the vehicle resulting in consequential
damage are not covered by the vehicle manufacturer's warranty.

A080A01S-AAT
TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION

Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic compo-
nents. It is possible for an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular
telephone to adversely affect electronic systems. For this reason, we recommend
that you carefully follow the radio manufacturer's instructions or consult your Hyundai
dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions if you choose to install one
of these devices.
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 2

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY 3

CORROSION PREVENTION & APPEARANCE CARE 4

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS 5

SECTION 6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS 7

CONSUMER INFORMATION 8

VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS 9

INDEX 10
A090A01A-AAT
SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING

This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTE.

These titles indicate the following:

! WARNING:
This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to
you or other persons if the warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided
with the warning.

! CAUTION:
This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its
equipment if the caution is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the
caution.

NOTE:
This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.
A100A01L-GAT tation, counterfeit or used salvage Hyundai Genuine Parts are only
GUIDE TO HYUNDAI GENUINE parts are not covered under the sold through authorized Hyundai
PARTS Hyundai New Vehicle Limited War- Dealership and Service Center.
ranty or any other Hyundai war-
1.What are Hyundai Genuine Parts? ranty. In addition, any damage to or
Hyundai Genuine Parts are the same failure of Genuine Hyundai Parts
parts used by Hyundai Motor Com- caused by the installation or failure
pany to manufacture vehicles. They of an imitation, counterfeit or used
are designed and tested for the salvage part is not covered by
optimum safety, performance, and Hyundai Motor Company.
reliability to our customers.
3. How can you tell if you purchasing
Hyundai Genuine Parts?
2. Why should you use genuine parts?
Look for the Hyundai Genuine Parts
Hyundai Genuine Parts are engi- Logo on the package (see below).
neered and built to meet rigid manu-
facturing requirements. Using imi- The export specifications are writ-
ten in English only. A100A03L

A100A01L A100A02L A100A04L

 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
(LEFT-HAND DRIVE)

B250A03E-GAT

HXDFL002-1
1. Rear Fog Light Switch (If installed)
2. Panel Brightness Control Knob (If installed) 14. Glove Box
3. Trip Computer Switch (If installed) 15. Hood Release Lever
4. TCS Switch (If installed) 16. Multi Box
5. Multi-Function Light Switch 17. Cruise Control Switch (If installed)
6. Horn and Driver's Airbag (If installed) 18. Front Ashtray
7. Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch 19. Seat Warmer (If installed)
8. Digital Clock 20. Headlight Washer Switch (If installed)
9. Audio System (If installed) 21. Headlight Leveling Switch (If installed)
10. Heating/Air Conditioning Control Panel 22. Shift Lever (If installed)
11. Cigarette Lighter 23. Parking Brake
12. Power Outlet 24. Console Box (If installed)
13. Passenger's Airbag (If installed) 25. Rear Ashtray

! CAUTION:
When installing a container of liquid air freshener inside the vehicle, do not place it near the
instrument cluster nor on the instrument panel pad surface. If there is any leakage from the
air freshener onto these areas (Instrument cluster, instrument panel pad or air ventilator), it
may damage these parts. If the liquid from air freshener does leak onto these areas, wash them
with water immediately.
 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
(RIGHT-HAND DRIVE)

B250B01E-GAT

HXDFL002-R
1. Glove Box 13. Panel Brightness Control Knob (If installed)
2. Passenger's Airbag (If installed) 14. Rear Fog Light Switch (If installed)
3. Power Outlet 15. Rear Ashtray
4. Cigarette Lighter 16. Console Box (If installed)
5. Heating/Air Conditioning Control Panel 17. Parking Brake
6. Audio System (If installed) 18. Shift Lever (If installed)
7. Digital Clock 19. Headlight Leveling Switch (If installed)
8. Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch 20. Headlight Washer Switch (If installed)
9. Horn and Driver's Airbag (If installed) 21. Seat Warmer (If installed)
10. Multi-Function Light Switch 22. Front Ashtray
11. TCS Switch (If installed) 23. Cruise Control Switch (If installed)
12. Trip Computer Switch (If installed) 24. Multi Box
25. Hood Release Lever

! CAUTION:
When installing a container of liquid air freshener inside the vehicle, do not place it near the
instrument cluster nor on the instrument panel pad surface. If there is any leakage from the
air freshener onto these areas (Instrument cluster, instrument panel pad or air ventilator), it
may damage these parts. If the liquid from air freshener does leak onto these areas, wash them
with water immediately.
YOUR VEHICLE AT A GLANCE

B255A01E-GAT
INDICATOR SYMBOLS ON THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
SRS (Airbag) Service Reminder
Door Ajar Warning Light
Indicator
ABS Service Reminder Indicator Low Fuel Level Warning Light

O/D OFF Indicator Light

Cruise Indicator Light (If installed)
(1.6 Automatic Transaxle only)

Turn Signal Indicator Lights Front Fog Indicator Light (If installed)

High Beam Indicator Light Malfunction Indicator Light

Traction Control Indicator Light
Low Oil Pressure Warning Light
(If installed)
Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level
Immobilizer Warning Indicator Light (If installed)
Warning Light

Charging System Warning Light Diesel Pre-heat Indicator Light (Diesel only)

Seat Belt Warning Light Fuel Filter Warning Light (Diesel only)

Trunk Lid /Tail Gate Open Warning Light

* More detailed explanations of these items will be found beginning on page 1-48
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

Fuel Recommendations ............................................... 1-2

Breaking In Your New Hyundai .................................... 1-3 1
Keys.............................................................................. 1-5
Immobilizer System ...................................................... 1-5
Door .............................................................................. 1-7
Theft-Alarm System .................................................... 1-10
Window ....................................................................... 1-13
Seat ............................................................................ 1-14

1
Seat Belts ....................................................................1-20
Child Restraint System ................................................1-26
Supplemental Restraint (AIRBAG) System .................1-37
Instrument Cluster and Indicator .................................1-44
Warning and Indicator Lights .......................................1-48
Trip Computer ..............................................................1-56
Multi-function Light Switch ...........................................1-58
Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch................................1-60
Sunroof ........................................................................1-70
Mirror ........................................................................... 1-74
Hood Release ..............................................................1-78
Cruise Control ..............................................................1-84
Heating and Cooling Control ........................................1-87
Stereo Sound System ...............................................1-104
Audio System ............................................................1-106
Antenna .....................................................................1-137
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
2 FUEL RECOMMENDATIONS
B010A02O-GAT
NOTE:
Use Unleaded Gasoline o For some countries, Hyundai ve-
hicles are designed to use leaded
! CAUTION:
gasoline. When you are going to Do not let any gasoline or water enter
use leaded gasoline, ask to the tank. This would make it neces-
Hyundai dealer whether leaded sary to drain it out and to bleed the
gasoline in your vehicle is avail- lines to avoid jamming the injection
able or not. pump and damaging the engine.
o Octane Rating of leaded gaso-
line is same with unleaded one.
B010B01A-AAT
Use Diesel What About Gasohol?
B010A02E Diesel fuel of 52 to 54 cetane is used in Gasohol (a mixture of 90% unleaded
Unleaded gasoline with a Pump Octane Hyundai vehicle. If two types of diesel gasoline and 10% ethanol or grain
Rating of 87 (Research Octane Number fuel are available, use summer or win- alcohol) may be used in your Hyundai.
91) or higher must be used in Hyundai ter fuel properly according to the fol- However, if your engine develops
vehicle. If leaded gasoline is used, it lowing temperature conditions. driveability problems, the use of 100%
will cause the catalytic converter to unleaded gasoline is recommended.
become ineffective and the emission o Above -5°C (23°F) ... Summer type Fuels with unspecified quantities of
control system to malfunction. This diesel fuel. alcohol, or alcohols other than ethanol,
can also result in increased mainte- o Below -5°C (23°F) ... Winter type should not be used.
nance expense. To avoid accidental diesel fuel.
use of leaded fuel, the large nozzle
used with leaded gasoline at service Watch the fuel level in the tank very
stations can not be inserted into fuel carefully : If the engine stops through
tank opening of Hyundai vehicle. fuel failure, the circuits must be com-
pletely purged to permit restarting.
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
BREAKING IN YOUR NEW 3
HYUNDAI
B010D01S-AAT B010E01A-AAT B020A01S-GAT
Do not Use Methanol Gasolines for Cleaner Air During the First 2,000 Km
Fuels containing methanol (wood al- To help contribute to cleaner air, (1,200 Miles) (Gasoline Engine)
cohol) should not be used in your Hyundai recommends that you use No formal "break-in" procedure is re-
Hyundai. This type of fuel can reduce gasolines treated with detergent addi- quired with your new Hyundai. How-
vehicle performance and damage com- tives, which help prevent deposit for- ever, you can contribute to the eco-
ponents of the fuel system. mation in the engine. These gasolines nomical operation and durability of your
will help the engine run cleaner and Hyundai by observing the following
enhance performance of the Emission
! CAUTION: Control System.
recommendations during the first 2,000
km (1,200 miles).
Your Hyundai's New Vehicle Lim-
ited Warranty may not cover dam- o Don't drive faster than 88 km/h (55
age to the fuel system and perfor- B010F01A-AAT mph).
mance problems that are caused by Operation in Foreign Countries o While driving, keep your engine
the use of methanol or fuels con- speed (rpm, or revolutions per
taining methanol. If you are going to drive your Hyundai
minute) between 2,000 rpm and
in another country, be sure to:
4,000 rpm.
o Use moderate acceleration. Don't
o Observe all regulations regarding
start, depress the accelerator pedal
registration and insurance.
fully.
o Determine that acceptable fuel is
o For the first 300 km (200 miles), try
available.
to avoid hard braking.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
4 KEYS

o Don't lug the engine (in other words, o While driving, keep your engine B030A01A-AAT

don't drive so slowly in too-high a speed (rpm, or revolutions per

gear that the engine "bucks": shift to minute) within 3,000 rpm.
a lower gear). o While driving, keep under three quar-
o Whether going fast or slow, vary ters of maximum speed.
your speed from time to time. o Use moderate acceleration. Don't
o Don't let the engine idle longer than start, depress the accelerator pedal
3 minutes at one time. fully.
o Don't tow a trailer during the first o For the first 300 km (200 miles), try
2,000 km (1,200 miles) of opera- to avoid hard braking.
tion. o Don't lug the engine (in other words,
don't drive so slowly in too-high a
B030A01E
gear that the engine "bucks": shift to
a lower gear). For greater convenience, the same
B020B01FC-GAT
o Whether going fast or slow, vary key operates all the locks in your
During the First 1,000 Km Hyundai. However, because the doors
your speed from time to time.
(600 Miles)(Diesel Engine) o Don't let the engine idle longer than can be locked without a key, carrying a
No formal "break-in" procedure is re- 3 minutes at one time. spare key is recommended in case
quired with your new Hyundai. How- o Don't tow a trailer during the first you accidentally lock one key inside
ever, you can contribute to the eco- 1,000 km (600 miles) of operation. the car.
nomical operation and durability of your
Hyundai by observing the following
recommendations during the first 1,000
km (600 miles).
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM 5

B030B01A-AAT B880A01A-GAT
NOTE:
Record Your Key Number (If installed) If you make your own duplicate
The immobilizer system is an anti-theft key, you will not be able to cancel
device, designed to deter automobile the system or start the engine.
theft.

B880C02A-GAT
B880B03A-GAT
Keys Key Numbers

B030B01E

A code number is stamped on the

number plate that came with the keys
to your Hyundai. This key number
plate should not be left with the keys
but kept in a safe place, not in the
vehicle. The key number should also
be recorded in a place where it can be AX10020A-1
B880C01L

found in an emergency. The vehicle key number is recorded

All of the locks fitted to the vehicle are
operated by the same key. However, upon a metal tag attached to the keys
If you need additional keys, or if you when the vehicle is first delivered to
should lose your keys, your authorized since it is possible to lock the doors
without the use of the key, care should you.
Hyundai dealer can make new keys if
be exercised to ensure that the key
you can supply the key number.
does not become locked inside the
vehicle by mistake.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
6

The key number should be recorded B880D02A-GAT

NOTE:
and kept in a safe place in case the Limp home procedures You can get the limp home pass-
need to order further keys arises. New word when the vehicle is first deliv-
keys are available from any Hyundai ered to you. If you do not have the
dealer by quoting the relevant key password, consult your authorized
number. Hyundai dealer.
In the interest of security, the metal tag
attached to the keys which bears the 1. To set the password you may turn
key number should be removed from the ignition key "ON" and then turn
the key ring after you receive your new it "OFF" according to the digit num-
vehicle. In addition, key numbers can- bers, then the immobilizer indicator
not be provided by Hyundai for secu- will blink along with the operation of
rity reasons. the ignition key. For example, turn
B880D02E
If you need additional keys or if you the ignition key once for digit num-
should lose your keys, your authorized In case the immobilizer warning indi- ber "1", and twice for "2", and so on.
Hyundai dealer can make new keys. cator blinks for five seconds when the However, for the digit number "0",
ignition key is turned to "ON" position, you must turn the ignition key for 10
this indicates that the immobilizer sys- times.
tem is out of order. And you cannot 2. Wait for 3~10 seconds.
start the engine without the limp home 3. You may set the remaining number
procedures with ignition key. of digits by following the same pro-
The following procedure is how to start cedures 1 and 2.
the engine with the function of the limp 4. If all of four digits have been tried
home. (0, 1, 2, 3 as a sample pass- successfully, turn the ignition key
word). "ON" and check that the immobi-
lizer indicator illuminates. From this
time, you have to start your engine
within 30 seconds. If you start your
engine after 30 seconds, your en-
gine will not start.
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
ILLUMINATED IGNITION DOOR 7
SWITCH
NOTE: B030C01Y-AAT B040A02Y-AAT

If the engine dies while driving after (If installed) DOOR LOCKS
limp home procedure, you can start
your engine within 8 seconds with- ! WARNING:
out limp home procedure again.
o Unlocked doors can be danger-
5. If the immobilizer indicator blinks for ous. Before you drive away (es-
five seconds, you have to try the pecially if there are children in
limp home procedure again from the car), be sure that all the doors
the beginning. are securely closed and locked
so that the doors cannot be inad-
After doing the limp home procedure, vertently opened from the inside.
you have to consult with your autho- This helps ensure that the doors
rized Hyundai dealer as soon as pos-
B030C01E will not be opened accidentally.
sible. Whenever a door is opened, the igni- Also, when combined with the
tion switch will be illuminated for your proper use of seat belts, locking
convenience, provided the ignition the doors helps keep occupants
! CAUTION:
switch is not in the "ON" position.
The light will go off approximately 10
from being ejected from the car
in case of an accident.
o If you fail to try the limp home seconds after closing the door or when o Before opening the door, always
procedure with the sequence of the ignition switch is turned on. look for and avoid oncoming traf-
three times, you have to wait for fic.
about one hour to do the limp o In case of accident, the door is
home procedure again. unlocked automatically (If in-
o If you cannot start your engine in stalled).
spite of limp home procedure,
have your vehicle towed by an
authorized Hyundai dealer.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
8

B040B01A-AAT B040C01S-AAT B040D01S-AAT

Locking and Unlocking Front Locking From the Outside Locking From the Inside
Doors With a Key
LOCK UNLOCK

UNLOCK LOCK

B040C01E HXD530

HXDFL2003 The doors can be locked without a key. To lock the doors from the inside,
o The door can be locked or unlocked To lock the doors first push the inside simply close the door and push the
with a key. lock switch to the "LOCK" position so lock switch to the "LOCK" position.
o Lock the door by turning the key that the red mark on the switch is not When this is done, neither the outside
toward the front of the vehicle and visible, then close the door. nor the inside door handles can be
unlock it by turning the key toward used.
the rear. NOTE:
o When locking the door this way, NOTE:
be careful not to lock the door When the door is locked, the red
with the ignition key left in the mark on the switch is not visible.
vehicle.
o To protect against theft, always
remove the ignition key, close all
windows, and lock all doors when
leaving your vehicle unattended.
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
9

B040E04A-AAT B040G01E-GAT
NOTE:
Child-Protector Rear Door Lock Central Door Lock (If installed) o When pushing the switch toward
the rear, all doors will unlock.
When pushing the switch toward
the front, all doors will lock.
o When the door is unlocked, the
red mark on the switch is visible.
o The central door locking is oper-
ated by turning the key (with theft-
alarm system: driver's door and
passenger's door, without theft-
alarm system: driver's door only)
B040E01E
toward the front or rear of the
HXDOM012
vehicle.
Your Hyundai is equipped with a "child- The central door locking is operated
protector" rear door lock assembly. by pushing the driver's door lock switch
When the lock mechanism is engaged, toward the front or rear of the vehicle.
the rear door cannot be opened from If the passenger and rear doors are
the inside. Its use is recommended open when the switch is pushed, the
whenever there are small children in door will remain locked when closed.
the rear seat.
To engage the child-protector feature
so that the door cannot be opened
from the inside, move the child-protec-
tor lever to the " " position and close
the door. Move the lever to the " "
position when normal door operation is
desired.
To open the door from the outside, pull
the outside door handle.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
10 THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM
B070A01A-AAT B070B01E-GAT
NOTE:
(If installed) Armed Stage 1) If any door, the trunk lid (4 door)/
This system is designed to provide tail gate (5 door) or hood remains
protection from unauthorized entry into open, the system will not be armed.
the car. This system is operated in 2) If this happens, rearm the system
three stages: the first is the "Armed" as described previous.
stage, the second is the "Alarm" stage, 3) Once the system is armed, only
and the third is the "Disarmed" stage. UNLOCK the trunk lid (4 door) may be
If triggered, the system provides an unlocked using the key without
audible alarm with blinking of the turn disarming the system.
signal light.

LOCK HXD200

Park the car and stop the engine. Arm

! CAUTION:
the system as described below. Do not arm the system until all pas-
sengers have left the car.
1) Remove the ignition key from the If the system is armed while a
ignition switch. passenger(s) remains in the car,
2) Make sure that the engine hood and the alarm may be activated when
trunk lid(4 door)/ tail gate (5 door) the remaining passenger(s) leaves
are locked. the car.
3) Lock the doors using the transmitter
of the keyless entry system.

After completion of the steps above,

the turn signal lights will blink once to
indicate that the system is armed.
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
11

B070C01E-GAT B070D03E-AAT
NOTE:
Alarm Stage Disarmed Stage o Once the system has been dis-
The alarm will be activated if any of the armed, it can not be rearmed ex-
following occurs while the car is parked cept by repeating the arming pro-
and the system is armed. cedures.
o When the system is disarmed
1) A door and tail gate (5 door) are with the interior light switched to
opened without using the transmit- "DR" the interior light will illumi-
ter. nate for 30 seconds.
2) The trunk lid (4 door) is opened
without using the key.
3) The hood is opened. ! CAUTION:
The siren will sound and the turn signal 3A9BA21 Only the transmitter can disarm the
light will blink continuously for 30 sec- The system will be disarmed when the armed stage. If the transmitter does
onds (E.C only/Except E.C: 3 times). following step is taken: not disarm the system, it is neces-
To turn off the system, unlock the door sary to take the following steps;
or tail gate (5 door) with the transmit- The driver's or passenger's door is
ter. unlocked by depressing the "UNLOCK" 1. Unlock the door with the key,
button on the transmitter. which will cause, the alarm to be
activated.
! CAUTION: After completion of the step above, the 2. Insert the key in the ignition key
cylinder and turn the ignition key
Avoid trying to start the engine while turn signal lights will blink twice to
indicate that the system is disarmed. to "ON" position.
the system is armed. 3. Wait for 30 seconds.

After completing the steps above,

the system will be disarmed.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
12

B070F01A-GAT B070E02HP-GAT
Keyless Entry System Replacing the battery Case
(If installed) When the transmitter's battery becomes
Locking doors weak, it may take several pushes on
1. Close all doors. the button to lock or unlock the doors,
2. Push the "LOCK" button on the trans- and the LED will not light. Replace the
mitter. battery as soon as possible.
3. At the same time all doors lock, the
turn signal lights will blink once to Battery type : CR2032 Battery
indicate that the system is armed.
Replacement instructions: MSO-0048-2
Unlocking doors
2. Remove the old battery from the
1. Push the "UNLOCK" button on the case and note the polarity. Make
transmitter. sure the polarity of the new battery
2. At the same time all doors unlock, is the same(+side facing down), then
the turn signal light will blink twice to insert it in the transmitter.
indicate that the system is disarmed.

Screwdriver
MSO-0048-1

1. Carefully seperate the case with a

blade screwdriver as shown in the
illustration.
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
WINDOW 13

B050A01A-AAT B060A02E-AAT
WINDOW GLASS POWER WINDOWS (If installed)

(1)
Close
Open

B060B01E

B050A01E
In order to prevent operation of the
B060A01E
passenger front and rear windows, a
To raise or lower the window, turn the The power windows operate when the window lock switch is provided on the
window regulator handle clockwise or ignition key is in the "ON" position. The armrest of the driver's door. To disable
counterclockwise. main switches are located on the the power windows, press the window
driver's armrest and control the front lock switch.
and rear windows on both sides of the To return to normal operation, press
! WARNING:
vehicle. The windows may be opened the window lock switch a second time.
by depressing the appropriate window
When opening or closing the win- switch and closed by pulling up the
dows, make sure your passenger's switch. To open the window on the
arms, hands and body are safely driver's side, press the switch(1) down.
out of the way. The window moves as long as the
switch is operated.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
14 SEAT

Auto-Down Window B080A01A-AAT B080B02FC-AAT

(Driver's Side) ADJUSTABLE FRONT SEATS Adjusting Seat Forward and

Rearward
The Auto-Down window is moved to its ! WARNING:
fully open position by pushing the
switch. To stop at the desired location, Never attempt to adjust the seat
the switch must be pulled up. while the vehicle is moving. This
could result in loss of control, or an
accident which may cause death,
serious injury, or property damage.
! WARNING:
1) Be careful that someone's head,
hands or body are not trapped by
a closing window.
B080B01E
2) Never try to operate the main
switch on the driver's door and To move the seat toward the front or
the individual door window rear, pull the lock release lever up-
switch in opposing directions at ward. This will release the seat on its
the same time. If this is done, the track so you can move it forward or
window will stop and cannot be rearward to the desired position. When
opened or closed. you find the position you want, release
3) Do not leave children alone in the the lever and slide the seat forward or
car. Always remove the ignition rearward on its track until it locks into
key for their safety. the desired position and cannot be
moved further.
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
15

is achieved. To lock the seatback into B080D03A-AAT

Adjustable Headrests
! WARNING:
position, release the recliner control
lever.
To ensure the seat is locked se-
curely, attempt to move the seat
forward or rearward without using ! WARNING:
the lock release lever.
To minimize risk of severe injury in Lock Knob
the event of a collision or a sudden
stop, both the driver and passen-
ger seatbacks should always be in
B080C01A-AAT
an upright position while the ve-
Adjusting Seatback Angle hicle is in motion. The protection
provided by the seat belts and HXDFL114

airbags in a frontal collision may be Headrests are designed to help re-

reduced significantly when the duce the risk of neck injuries.
seatbacks are reclined. There is To raise the headrest, pull it up. To
greater risk that the driver and pas- lower it, push it down while pressing
senger will slide under the seat belt the lock knob.
which may result in serious injury if
a crash occurs when the seatbacks
are reclined. The seat belt cannot
provide full protection to an occu-
B080C01E
pant if the seat back is reclined.
To recline the seatback, lean forward
to take your weight off it, then pull up
on the recliner control lever at the
outside edge of the seat. Now lean
back until the desired seatback angle
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
16

B080F01S-AAT
o Do not adjust the headrest hejght Seat Cushion Height Adjustment
! WARNING: while the vehicle is in motion. (Driver's Seat Only) (If installed)

B080E01O-AAT
Lumbar Support Control
(Driver's seat only) (If installed)
1

B080D01JM B080F01E

o For maximum effectiveness in case To raise or lower the front part of the
of an accident, the headrest should seat cushion, turn the front knob for-
be adjusted so the middle of the ward or rearward. To raise or lower the
headrest is at the same height as rear part of the seat cushion, turn the
the top of the occupant's eyes. The B080E01E
rear knob forward or rearward.
use of a cushion that holds the To adjust the lumbar support, turn the
body away from the seatback is handle on the outboard or left side of
not recommended. the seat. To increase the amount of
o Do not operate the vehicle with the lumbar support, pull the lever forward.
headrests removed as severe in- To decrease it, push the lever toward
jury to an occupant may occur in the rear.
the event of an accident. Head-
rests may provide protection 1. Minimum support
against severe neck injuries when 2. Maximum support
properly adjusted.
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
17

B110A03E-AAT
Folding rear seatbacks
(If installed) ! WARNING:
! WARNING:
When you return the rear seatback The purpose of the fold-down rear
to its upright position after being seatbacks is to allow you to carry
folded down, be careful not to dam- larger items than could otherwise be
age the seat belt webbing or buckle. accommodated. Never allow passen-
In addition, do not allow the seat gers to sit on top of the folded down
belt webbing or buckle to get caught seat back while the car is moving as
or pinched in the rear seat. this is not a proper seating position
and no seat belts are available for
use. This could result in serious
injury or death in case of an accident
or sudden stop. Objects carried on
B110A01E the folded down seatback should not
The rear seatbacks may be folded to extend higher than the top of the
facilitate carrying long items or to in- front seats. This could allow cargo to
crease the luggage capacity of the slide forward and cause injury or
vehicle. damage during sudden stops.

o To unlock the seatback, pull up the

seatback locking knob, then fold
seat toward the front of the vehicle. B110B01E

o When you return the seatback to its

upright position, always be sure it
has locked into position by pushing
on the top of the seatback.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
18

B080G01E-GAT
Folding Rear Seatback and Seat
Cushion (5 Door) ! CAUTION: ! WARNING:
After folding the rear seatback and o The purpose of the fold-down
B seat cushion, the headrest can be rear seat back and the fold-up rear
stored in the trunk so that it will not seat cushion is to allow you to
be thrown forward in the case of a carry more objects than could be
sudden stop or an accident. accommodated. Do not allow pas-
sengers to sit on the cargo area
Strap while the car is moving. This is
not a proper seating position and
no seat belts are available for use
when the seat back is folded down.
This could result in serious in-
A B080G01E-1
jury or death in case of an acci-
For convenience, the seatback and Warning label dent or a sudden stop. Objects
seat cushion may be folded down and should not extend higher than
up. the top of the front seatbacks.
This could allow cargo to slide
1. Remove the headrest. forward and cause injury or dam-
2. Pull the strap of the seat cushion (A) B080H01E-1
age during sudden stops.
upward to fold up the seat cushion. o WARNING LABEL: When return-
o When you return the seatback to its ing the seat cushion to the seat-
3. Pull the seatback locking knob (B)
upright position, always be sure it is ing position, place the seat belt
on the seatback to fold-down the
locked into position by pulling and buckles on top of the cushion.
seatback.
pushing on the top of the seatback. o When you return the folded down
4. Then, pull forward on the seatback
panel. seat back to its upright position,
be sure to place the rear seat belt
buckles on the seat bight between
the seat cushion and seatback.
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
SEAT WARMER REAR SEAT WARNING 19

B100A01E-AAT B140A01S-AAT
(If installed)
! WARNING:
Be very careful not to injure by low
temperature burn or an attack of fe-
ver as following occupants; infants,
children, old man, drunken man,
people who is taken sleeping drug or
cold remedy.

B140A01E
HXDFL100
For the safety of all passengers, lug-
The seat warmer is provided to warm gage or other cargo should not be piled
the front seats during cold weather. higher than the top of the seatback. In
With the ignition key in the "ON" posi- addition, do not place objects on the
tion, push either of the switches to rear shelf as they may move forward
warm the driver's seat or the during braking or in an accident and
passenger's seat. may strike and injure vehicle passen-
During mild weather or under condi- gers.
tions where the operation of the seat
warmer is not needed, keep the
switches in the "OFF" position.

NOTE:
The seat warmer may not operate if
ambient temperature is warm
enough.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
20 SEAT BELTS

B150A02A-AAT B150C03A-AAT B150D01S-AAT

SEAT BELT PRECAUTIONS Larger Children Pregnant Women
All occupants of the vehicle should Children who are too large for child The use of a seat belt is recommended
wear their seat belts at all times. In- restraint systems should always oc- for pregnant women to lessen the
deed, your province's laws may re- cupy the rear seat and use the avail- chance of injury in an accident. When
quire that some or all occupants of the able lap/shoulder belts. The lap por- a seat belt is used, it should be placed
vehicle use seat belts. tion should be fastened snug on the as low and snugly as possible on the
The possibility of injury or the severity hips and as low as possible. Check hips, not across the abdomen. For
of injury in an accident will be de- belt fit periodically. A child's squirming specific recommendations, consult a
creased if this elementary safety pre- could put the belt out of position. Chil- physician.
caution is observed. In addition, follow dren are afforded the most safety in
the other instructions provided in this the event of an accident when they are
section. restrained by a proper restraint sys- B150E01A-AAT
tem in the rear seat. If a larger child Injured Person
(over age 13) must be seated in the
B150B01Y-GAT
front seat, the child should be securely A seat belt should be used when an
Infant or Small Child injured person is being transported.
restrained by the available lap/shoul-
Some countries require the use of der belt and the seat should be placed When this is necessary, you should
child restraint systems for infants and in the rearmost position. Children un- consult a physician for recommenda-
small children. Whether this is required der the age of 13 should be restrained tions.
by law or not, it is strongly recom- securely in the rear seat. Never place
mended that a child restraint seat or a child under the age of 13 in the front
infant restraint system be used for seat. NEVER place a rear facing child
infants or small children weighing less seat in the front seat of a vehicle.
than 18 kilograms (40 pounds).

NOTE:
Small children are best protected in
an accident when properly re-
strained by a child restraint system.
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
21

B150F01A-AAT B160A01A-AAT
One Person Per Belt CARE OF SEAT BELTS
! WARNING:
Two people (including children) should Seat belt systems should never be
never attempt to use a single seat belt. Sitting in a reclined position or ly- disassembled or modified. In addition,
This could increase the severity of ing down when your vehicle is in care should be taken to assure that
injuries in case of an accident. motion can be dangerous. Even if seat belts and belt hardware are not
you buckle up, your seat belts can't damaged by seat hinges, doors or
do their job when you're reclined. other abuse.
The shoulder belt can't do its job
B150G01A-AAT
because it won't be against your
Do Not Lie Down
body. Instead, it will be in front of
To reduce the chance of injuries in the you. In a crash you could go into it ! WARNING:
event of an accident and to achieve with great force, receiving serious When you return the rear seatback
maximum effectiveness of the restraint neck or other injuries. to its upright position after being
system, all passengers should be sit- The lap belt can't do its job either. In folded down, be careful not to dam-
ting up and the front seats should be in a crash the belt could go up over age the seat belt webbing or buckle.
an upright position when the car is your abdomen. The belt forces In addition, do not allow the seat
moving. A seat belt cannot provide would be applied there, not at your belt webbing or buckle to get caught
proper protection if the person is lying strong pelvic bones. or pinched in the rear seat.
down in the rear seat or if the front seat This could cause serious internal
is in a reclined position. injuries.
For proper protection when the ve-
hicle is in motion, have the seatback
B160B01A-AAT
upright. Then sit back in the seat
Periodic Inspection
and wear your seat belt properly.
See page 1-23. It is recommended that all seat belts
be inspected periodically for wear or
damage of any kind. Parts of the sys-
tem that are damaged should be re-
placed as soon as possible.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
22

B160C01A-AAT B170A04A-AAT To adjust the height of the seat belt

Keep Belts Clean and Dry HEIGHT ADJUSTABLE FRONT anchor, lower or raise the height ad-
Seat belts should be kept clean and SEAT SHOULDER BELT juster into an appropriate position. To
dry. If belts become dirty, they can be (If installed) raise the height adjuster, pull it up. To
cleaned by using a mild soap solution lower it, push it down while pressing
and warm water. Bleach, dye, strong the height adjuster button.
detergents or abrasives should not be Release the button to lock the anchor
used because they may damage and into position. Try sliding the height
weaken the fabric. adjuster to make sure that it has locked
into position.

B160D01A-AAT ! WARNING:
When to Replace Seat Belts
o The height adjuster must be in
Entire in-use seat belt assembly or B170A01E the locked position when the
assemblies should be replaced if the You can adjust the height of the shoul- vehicle is moving.
vehicle has been involved in an acci- der belt anchor to one of 4 positions for o The misadjustment of height of
dent. This should be done even if no maximum comfort and safety. the shoulder belt could reduce
damage is visible. Additional ques- If the height of the adjusting seat belt is the effectiveness of the seat belt
tions concerning seat belt operation too near your neck, you will not be in a crash.
should be directed to your Hyundai getting the most effective protection.
Dealer. The shoulder portion should be ad-
justed so that it lies across your chest
and midway over your shoulder near-
est the door and not your neck.
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
23

B180A02A-GAT ever, the belt will lock into position. It snugly around your hips. If you lean
SEAT BELTS-Driver's and will also lock if you try to lean forward forward in a slow, easy motion, the belt
Passenger's 3-Point System with too quickly. will extend and let you move around. If
Webbing Clamp Locking Retrac- there is a sudden stop or impact, how-
tor (If installed) B180A01A-GAT ever, the belt will lock into position. It
To Fasten Your Belt SEAT BELTS-Driver's 3-Point will also lock if you try to lean forward
System with Emergency too quickly. Check to make sure that
the belt is properly locked and that the
Locking Retractor belt is not twisted.
To Fasten Your Belt
B200A01S-GAT
Adjusting Your Seat Belt

B180A01L

To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of

the retractor and insert the metal tab
into the buckle. There will be an au- B180A01L
dible "click" when the tab locks into the
To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of
buckle.
the retractor and insert the metal tab
The seat belt automatically adjusts to B200A01L
into the buckle. There will be an au-
the proper length only after the lap belt You should place the belt as low as
dible "click" when the tab locks into the
is adjusted manually so that it fits possible on your hips, not on your
buckle.
snugly around your hips. If you lean waist. If the belt is located too high on
The seat belt automatically adjusts to
forward in a slow, easy motion, the belt your body, you could slide under it in
the proper length only after the lap belt
will extend and let you move around. If case of accident or a sudden stop.
is adjusted manually so that it fits
there is a sudden stop or impact, how-
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
24

This could result of death, serious B220A01A-AAT B220B01A-AAT

injury or property damage. Both arms SEAT BELTS Adjusting Your Seat Belt
should not be under or over the belt. (2-Point Static Type)
Rather, one should be over and the (Rear Seat Center) (If installed)
other under, as shown in the illustra- To Fasten Your Seat Belt
tion. Too
Never wear the seat belt under the arm high
nearest to the door.
B210A01A-AAT
To Release the Seat Belt Correct
Shorten

HTB226

With a 2-point static type seat belt, the

length must be adjusted manually so it
HFC2085-1 fits snugly around your body. Fasten
To fasten a 2-point static type belt, the belt and pull on the loose end to
insert the metal tab into the locking tighten. The belt should be placed as
buckle. There will be an audible "click" low as possible on your hips, not on
when the tab locks into the buckle. your waist. If the belt is too high, it
Check to make sure the belt is properly could increase the possibility of your
B210A01L
locked and that the belt is not twisted. being injured in an accident.
The seat belt is released by pressing
the release button in the locking buckle.
When it is released, the belt should
automatically draw back into the re-
tractor. If this does not happen, check
the belt to be sure it is not twisted, then
try again.
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
25

B220C01A-AAT B220A01E-GAT There will be an audible "click" when

To Release the Seat Belt SEAT BELTS - Center Rear Seat the tab locks in the buckle. The seat
3-Point System With Emergency belt automatically adjusts to the proper
Locking Retractor (If installed) length only after the lap belt is adjusted
manually so that it fits snugly around
your hips. If you lean forward in a slow,
easy motion, the belt will extend and
(c) let you move around. If there is a
sudden stop or impact, the belt will lock
(a) into position. It will also lock if you try to
lean forward too quickly.

(b) (d)
HXDFL429

When you want to release the seat

belt, press the button in the locking B220A01E

buckle. 1. Before fastening the rear seat cen-

ter belt, confirm the metal tab (a)
and buckle (b) are latched together.
! WARNING: 2. After confirming that (a) and (b) are
The center lap belt latching mecha- latched, pull the seat belt out of the
nism is different from those for the retractor and insert the metal tab (c)
rear seat shoulder belts. When fas- into the buckle (d). B220A02Y

tening the rear seat shoulder belts

or the center lap belt, make sure
they are inserted into the correct
buckles to obtain maximum protec-
tion from the seat belt system and
assure proper operation.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
26 CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

B220C01Y-GAY B230A03A-GAT
To Release the Seat Belt (If installed)
! WARNING: Children riding in the car should sit in
o When using the rear seat center the rear seat and must always be
belt, you must lock all metal tabs properly restrained to minimize the
and buckles. If any metal tab or risk of injury in an accident, sudden
buckle is not locked, it will in- stop or sudden maneuver. According
crease the chance of injury in the to accident statistics, children are safer
event of collision. when properly restrained in the rear
o Never unlock the metal tab (a) seats than in the front seat. Larger
and the buckle (b) with the fol- children not in a child restraint should
lowing exceptions. use one of the seat belts provided.
(1)In case of folding rear You are required by law to use safety
B220C01E
seatbacks down. restraints for children. If small children
(2)If transporting an object on When you want to release the seat
ride in your vehicle you must put them
the rear seat may cause dam- belt, press the button in the locking
in a child restraint system (safety seat).
age to the rear seat center buckle.
Children could be injured or killed in a
belt. crash if their restraints are not properly
o Lock the metal tab (a) and the secured. For small children and ba-
buckle (b) immediately after fold- ! WARNING: bies, a child seat or infant seat must be
ing rear seatbacks up. The center belt latching mechanism used. Before buying a particular child
o To disconnect the metal tab (a) is different from those for the rear restraint system, make sure it fits your
from the buckle (b), insert a sharp- seat shoulder belts. When fasten- car and seat belts, and fits your child.
ended tool into the groove lo- ing the rear seat shoulder belts or Follow all the instructions provided by
cated on the buckle (b). the rear seat center belt, make sure the manufacturer when installing the
(4 DOOR only) they are inserted into the correct child restraint system.
buckles to obtain maximum protec-
tion from the seat belt system and
assure proper operation.
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
27

o Children who are too large to be o Never allow a child to stand up or

! WARNING: in a child restraint should sit in kneel on the seat.
the rear seat and be restrained o Never use an infant carrier or
o A child restraint system must be
with the available lap/shoulder child safety seat that "hooks"
placed in the rear seat. Never
install a child or infant seat on belts. Never allow children to ride over a seatback; it may not pro-
in the front passenger seat. vide adequate security in an ac-
the front passenger's seat.
o Always make sure that the shoul- cident.
Should an accident occur and
cause the passenger's side airbag der belt portion of the outboard o Never allow a child to be held in
lap/shoulder belt is positioned a person's arms while they are in
to deploy, it could severely in-
midway over the shoulder, never a moving vehicle, as this could
jure or kill an infant or child seated
in an infant or child seat. Thus, across the neck or behind the result in serious injury to the
back. Moving the child closer to child in the event of an accident
only use a child restraint in the
the center of the vehicle may help or a sudden stop. Holding a child
rear seat of your vehicle.
provide a good shoulder belt fit. in a moving vehicle does not
o Since a safety belt or child re-
The lap belt portion of the lap/ provide the child with any means
straint system can become very
hot if it is left in a closed vehicle, shoulder belt or the center seat of protection during an accident,
lap belt must always be posi- even if the person holding the
be sure to check the seat cover
tioned as low as possible on the child is wearing a seat belt.
and buckles before placing a
child there. child's hips and as snug as pos- o If the child restaint seat is not
sible. anchored properly, the risk of a
o When the child restraint system
o If the seat belt will not properly fit child being seriously injured or
is not in use, store it in the trunk
or fasten it with a safety belt so the child, Hyundai recommends killed in a collision greatly in-
the use of an approved booster creases.
that it will not be thrown forward
seat in the rear seat in order to
in the case of a sudden stop or an
accident. raise the child's seating height
so that the seat belt will properly
fit the child.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
28

B235G01Y-GAT back and forth, and side to side to B230G01A-GAT

Installation on Center Rear Seats ensure that it is properly secured by Installation on the Outboard Rear
2 point static type the seat belt. Seats
If the child seat moves, readjust the
length of the seat belt. Then, if
equipped, insert the child restraint
tether strap hook into the child re-
straint hook holder and tighten to se-
cure the seat. Always refer to the child
restraint system manufacturer's rec-
ommendation before installing the child
restraint system in your vehicle.
B235G02Y

3 point type B230G01E

To install a child restraint system on

the outboard rear seats, extend the
shoulder/lap belt from its retractor.
Buckle the seat belt and allow the seat
belt to take up any slack. Make sure
that the lap portion of the belt is tight
around the child restraint system and
the shoulder portion of the belt is posi-
tioned so that it cannot interfere with
B235G01Y the child's head or neck. After installa-
tion of the child restraint system, try to
Use the center seat belt for the rear to move it in all directions to be sure the
secure the child restraint system as child restraint system is securely in-
illustrated. After installation of the child stalled.
restraint system, rock the child seat
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
29

If you need to tighten the belt, pull B230B02A-GAT B230C03A-GAT

more webbing toward the retractor. Using a Child Restraint System Securing a Child Restraint Sys-
When you unbuckle the seat belt and with "Tether Anchorage" Sys- tem with "Tether Anchorage"
allow it to retract, the retractor will tem System(4 Door)
automatically revert back to its normal
Three child restraint hook holders are
seated passenger emergency locking Bolt, Holder located on the rear seat package tray.
usage condition. (5/16"-22 mm)
Child Restraint
NOTE: Hook Holder
Washer, Conical Spring
o Before installing the child re- Tether anchor
cover
straint system, read the instruc-
Holder,
tions supplied by the child re- Child Restraint Hook
straint system manufacturer.
o If the seat belt does not operate Retainer Washer
as described, have the system
HSM386
checked immediately by your
authorized Hyundai dealer. For small children and babies, the use
of a child seat or infant seat is required. G230C02E
This child seat or infant seat should be
! WARNING: of appropriate size for the child and 1. Open the tether anchor cover on the
Do not install any child restraint should be installed in accordance with rear seat package tray.
system in the front passenger seat. the manufacturer's instructions. It is
Should an accident occur and cause further recommanded that the seat be
the passenger's side airbag to de- placed in the vehicle's rear seat since
ploy, it could severely injure or kill this can make an important contribu-
an infant or child seated in an infant tion to safety. Your vehicle is provided
or child seat. Therefore, only use a three child restraint hook holders for
child restraint system in the rear installing the child seat or infant seat.
seat of your vehicle.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
30

REAR SEAT PACKAGE TRAY For vehicles with adjustable head- B230E03E-GAT

rests, route the tether strap under Securing a Child Restraint Sys-
Child restraint hook holders the headrest and between the head- tem with "Tether Anchorage"
rest posts, otherwise route the tether System (5 Door)
strap over the top of the seatback.
Three child restraint hook holders are
3. Connect the tether strap hook to the
located on the rear luggage compart-
child restraint hook holder and
ment floor.
tighten to secure the seat.

Tether strap hook

B230E03E

This symbol indicates the location of

user ready tether anchorage.
Front of Vehicle B230C01E

2. Route the child restraint seat strap

over the seatback.
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
31

For vehicles with adjustable head-

REAR LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT
rests, route the tether strap under
FLOOR
the headrest and between the head-
rest posts, otherwise route the tether
strap over the top of the seatback.
3. Connect the tether strap hook to the
Child restraint child restraint hook holder and
hook holders tighten to secure the seat.

Tether anchor Child Restraint

cover Hook Holder G230C02E-1

1. Open the tether anchor cover on the

rear luggage compartment floor.

Tether strap hook

Front of Vehicle B230C02E-2

2. Route the child restraint seat strap

over the seatback.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
32

B230D03E-GAT An ISOFIX-seat can only be installed if

Securing a Child Restraint Sys- it has vehicle-specific approval in ac-
tem with "ISOFIX" System and cordance with the requirements of ISOFIX Anchor ISOFIX Anchor
Position Indicator
"Tether Anchorage" System ECE-R44. For your Hyundai, the
Hyundai ISOFIX GR1 / Hyundai Duo /
Römer ISOFIX GR1 and the Römer
Duo ISOFIX / Britax Duo ISOFIX is
approved according to the requirement
ECE-R44. This seat has been tested
extensively by Hyundai and is recom-
mended for your Hyundai.
B230D02E

NOTE: On each side of the rear seat, between

At present, this seat is the only one the cushion and backrest, are located
complying with that provision. In a pair of ISOFIX anchorage points
B230F01E
case that other manufacturers will together with a top tether mounting on
ISOFIX is a standardised method of furnish proof of a respective certifi- the luggage compartment. During the
fitting child seats that eliminates the cation, Hyundai is going to evalu- installing, the seat has to be engaged
need to use the standard adult seat ate this seat carefully and will give at the anchorage-points in a way you
belt to secure the seat in the vehicle. a recommendation provided that can hear it clicking (check by pulling!)
This enables a much more secure and seat complies to the law. Please ask and has to be fixed with the Top Tether-
positive location with the added benefit your Hyundai dealer in this respect. belt on the belonging point in the
of easier and quicker installation. luggagecompartment. The installing
and the use of a child-seat has to be
done according to the installing-
manual, which is added to the ISOFIX-
seat.
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
33

NOTE: 2. Connect the tether strap hook to the

plates or tabs must be latched
An ISOFIX-child-seat can only be child restraint hook holder and
securely in their seat belt buckles
installed if the seat has a vehicle- tighten to secure the seat. Refer to
and the seat belt webbing must be
specific approval according to ECE- "Securing a Child Restraint System
retracted behind the child restraint
R44. Before using the ISOFIX-child- with the Tether Anchorage System"
to prevent the child from reaching
seat, which was bought for another on page 1-29.
and taking hold of unretracted seat
car, ask your Hyundai-dealer belts. Unlatched metal latch plates
whether this seat-type is approved or tabs may allow the child to
and recommended for your ! WARNING: reach the unretracted seat belts
Hyundai. which may result in strangulation
o Do not install a child restraint seat
at the center of the rear seat using and a serious injury or death to the
To secure the child restraint seat child in the child restraint.
the vehicle's ISOFIX anchors. The
ISOFIX anchors are only provided o Do not mount more than one child
for the left and right outboard rear restraint to a child restraint lower
seating positions. Do not misuse anchorage point. The improper
the ISOFIX anchors by attempting increased load may cause the an-
to attach a child restraint seat in chorage points or tether anchor to
the middle of the rear seat to the break, causing serious injury or
ISOFIX anchors. In a crash, the death.
child restraint seat ISOFIX attach- o Attach the ISOFIX or ISOFIX-com-
ments may not be strong enough patible child restraint seat only
to secure the child restraint seat to the appropriate locations
properly in the center of the rear shown in the illustration.
B230D03E
seat and may break, causing seri- o Always follow the installation and
1. To engage the child restraint seat to ous injury or death. use instructions provided by the
the ISOFIX anchor, insert the child o When using the vehicle’s “ISOFIX” manufacturer of the child re-
restraint seat latch into the ISOFIX system to install a child restraint straint.
anchor. Listen for the audible "click" system in the rear seat, all unused
sound. vehicle rear seat belt metal latch
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
34

B230H03E-GAT L1: Suitable for "Römer ISOFIX GR1"

Child Seat Restraint Suitability a proved for use in this group
For Seat Position (Approval No: E1 R44-03301133)
Use child safety seats that have been X : Seat poition not suitable for chil-
officially approved and are appropriate dren in this group
for your children. When using the child
safety seats, refer to the following table.
Seating Position B180B04S-GAT
Age Group Front Rear Rear Pre-tensioner Seat Belt
Passenger Outboard Center (If installed)
HXG229
0 : Up to 10 kg Your Hyundai vehicle is equipped with
X U U The pre-tensioner seat belt operates
(0 ~ 9 months) driver's and front passenger's pre-
0+ : Up to 13 kg tensioner seat belts. The purpose of in a similar way as an Emergency
(0 ~ 2 years) X U U
the pre-tensioner is to make sure that Locking Retractor (ELR) type of seat
I : 9kg to 18kg the seat belts fit tightly against the belt. When the vehicle stops suddenly,
(9 months ~ 4 occupant's body in certain frontal col- or if the occupant tries to lean forward
X U, L1 U
lisions. too quickly, the seat belt retractor will
years)
The pre-tensioner seat belts can be lock into position. In certain frontal
II & III : 15kg to
activated alone or, where the frontal collisions, the pre-tensioner will acti-
36kg X UF UF vate and pull the seat belt into tighter
collision is severe enough, together
(4 ~ 12 years) contact against the occupant's body.
with the airbags.
U : Suitable for "universal" category
restraints approved for use in this
group
UF : Suitable for forward-facing "uni-
versal" category restraints ap-
proved for use in this group
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
35

Driver's airbag 1 Passenger's

o When the pre-tensioner seat belts
airbag ! WARNING:
are activated, a loud noise may
be heard and fine dust, which
To obtain maximum benefit from a may appear to be smoke, may be
pre-tensioner seat belt: visible in the passenger compart-
ment. These are normal operat-
1. The seat belt must be worn cor- ing conditions and are not haz-
rectly. ardous.
3
2. The seat belt must be adjusted to o Although it is harmless, the fine
2 the correct position. dust may cause skin irritation
and should not be breathed for
B180B01O
prolonged periods. Wash your
NOTE:
The seat belt pre-tensioner system hands and face thoroughly after
o Both the driver's and front
consists mainly of the following com- an accident in which the pre-
passenger's pre-tensioner seat
ponents. tensioner seat belts were acti-
belts will be activated in certain
vated.
frontal collisions. The pre-
Their locations are shown in the illus- tensioner seat belts can be acti-
tration. vated alone or, where the frontal
collision is severe enough, to-
1.SRS airbag warning light gether with the airbags. The pre-
2.Seat belt pre-tensioner assembly tensioners will be activated un-
3.SRS control module der these conditions even if the
seat belts are not being worn at
the time of the collision.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
36

o Improper handling of the pre-

! CAUTION: ! WARNING: tensioner seat belt assemblies,
o Because the sensor that activates o Pre-tensioners are designed to and failure to heed the warnings
the SRS airbag is connected with operate only one time. After acti- to not strike, modify, inspect, re-
the pre-tensioner seat belt, the vation, pre-tensioner seat belts place, service or repair the pre-
SRS airbag warning light AIR
BAG on must be replaced. All seat belts, tensioner seat belt assemblies
the instrument panel will blink of any type, should always be may lead to improper operation
for approximately 6 seconds af- replaced after they have been or inadvertent activation and se-
ter the ignition key has been worn during a collision. rious injury.
turned to the "ON" position, and o The pre-tensioner seat belt as- o Always wear seat belts when driv-
then it should turn off. sembly mechanisms become hot ing or riding in a motor vehicle.
o If the pre-tensioner seat belt is during activation. Do not touch
not working properly, this warn- the pre-tensioner seat belt as-
ing light will illuminate even if semblies for several minutes af-
there is no malfunction of the ter they have been activated.
SRS airbag system . If the SRS o Do not attempt to inspect or re-
airbag warning light does not place the pre-tensioner seat belts
illuminate when the ignition key yourself. This must be done by
is turned to "ON" or if it remains an authorized Hyundai dealer.
illuminated after blinking for ap- o Do not strike the pre-tensioner
proximately 6 seconds, or if it seat belt assemblies.
illuminates while the vehicle is o Do not attempt to service or re-
being driven, please have an au- pair the pre-tensioner seat belt
thorized Hyundai dealer inspect system in any manner.
the pre-tensioner seat belts and
SRS airbag system as soon as
possible.
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT (AIRBAG) SYSTEM 37

B240A03F-GAT the front passenger with additional pro-

(If installed) tection than that offered by the seat o The SRS is designed to deploy
Driver's Airbag belt system alone, in case of a frontal the airbags only when an impact
impact of sufficient severity. is sufficiently severe and when
the impact angle is less than 30°
from the forward longitudinal axis
NOTE:
of the vehicle and will not deploy
Be sure to read information about
in side, rear or rollover impacts.
the SRS on the labels provided on
Additionally, the airbags will only
the backside of the sun visor and in
deploy once. Thus, seat belts
the glove box.
must be worn at all times.

B240A01E ! WARNING:
Your Hyundai is equipped with a o As its name implies, the SRS is
Supplemental Restraint (Airbag) Sys- designed to work with, and be
tem. The indications of the system's supplemental to, the driver's and Rear impact
presence are the letters "SRS AIR the passenger's three point seat
BAG" embossed on the airbag pad belt systems and is not a substi-
cover in the steering wheel and the tute for them. Therefore your seat
passenger's side front panel pad above belts must be worn at all times Side Impact
the glove box. while the vehicle is in motion. In Rollover
addition, the airbags deploy only B240C01E
The Hyundai SRS consists of airbags in certain frontal impact condi- o Front airbags are not intended to
installed under the pad covers in the tions severe enough to cause deploy in side-impact, rear-im-
center of the steering wheel and the significant injury to the vehicle pact or rollover crashes. In addi-
passenger's side front panel above the occupants. tion, airbags will not deploy in
glove box. The purpose of the SRS is frontal crashes below the deploy-
to provide the vehicle's driver and/or ment threshold speed.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
38

o The driver should sit back as far o Do not install a child restraint o The SRS airbag system must
as possible while still maintain- system in the front passenger deploy very rapidly to provide
ing control of the vehicle. If you seat position. A child restraint protection in a crash. If an occu-
are sitting too close to the airbag, system must never be placed in pant is out of position because
it can cause death or serious the front seat. The infant or child of not wearing a seat belt, the
injury when it inflates. could be severely injured or killed airbag may forcefully contact the
o No objects should be placed over by an airbag deployment in case occupant causing serious or fa-
or near the airbag modules on of an accident. tal injuries.
the steering wheel, instrument o Do not allow children to ride in
panel, and the front passenger's the front passenger seat. If older
panel above the glove box, children (teenagers and older)
because any such object could must ride in the front seat, make
B240B02A-GAT
cause harm if the vehicle is in a sure they are always properly
crash severe enough to cause belted and that the seat is moved SRS Components and Functions
the airbags to deploy. back as far as possible.
o If the airbags deploy, they must o For maximum safety protection
be replaced by an authorized in all types of crashes, all occu-
Hyundai dealer. pants including the driver should
o Do not tamper with or discon- always wear their seat belts
nect SRS wiring, or other com- whether or not an airbag is also
ponents of the SRS system. Do- provided at their seating posi-
ing so could result in injury, due tion to minimize the risk of se-
to accidental firing of the airbags vere injury or death in the event
or by rendering the SRS inopera- of a crash. Do not sit or lean
tive. unnecessarily close to the airbag
B240B01L
while the vehicle is in motion.
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
39

The SRS consists of the following com-

ponents:

- Driver's Airbag Module

- Passenger's Airbag Module
- SRS Service Reminder Indicator (SRI)
- SRS Control Module (SRSCM)

The SRSCM continually monitors all

elements while the ignition is "ON" to
determine if a frontal or near-frontal
impact is severe enough to require B240B02L B240B03L

airbag deployment. The airbag modules are located both Upon deployment, tear seams molded
in the center of the steering wheel and directly into the pad covers will sepa-
The SRS service reminder indicator in the front passenger's panel above rate under pressure from the expan-
(SRI) on the instrument panel will blink the glove box. When the SRSCM de- sion of the airbags. Further opening of
for about 6 seconds after the ignition tects a considerable impact to the front the covers then allows full inflation of
key is turned to the "ON" position or of the vehicle, it will automatically de- the airbags.
after the engine is started, after which ploy the airbags.
the SRI should go out. A fully inflated airbag in combination
with a properly worn seat belt slows
the driver's or the passenger's forward
motion, thus reducing the risk of head
or chest injury.
After complete inflation, the airbag
immediately starts deflating, enabling
the driver to maintain forward visibility.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
40

Passenger's Airbag Passenger's Airbag o The SRS can function only when
the ignition key is in the "ON"
position. If the SRS SRI does not
come on, or continuously re-
mains on after flashing for about
6 seconds when the ignition key
is turned to the "ON" position, or
after the engine is started, comes
on while driving, the SRS is not
working properly. If this occurs,
B240B04E B240B05L have your vehicle immediately
inspected by your Hyundai
dealer.
! CAUTION: ! WARNING:
o Before you replace a fuse or dis-
When installing a container of liq- connect a battery terminal, turn
o When the SRS is activated, there the ignition key to the "LOCK"
uid air freshener inside a vehicle, may be a loud noise and fine dust
do not place it near the instrument position or remove the ignition
will be released throughout the key. Never remove or replace the
cluster nor on the instrument panel vehicle. These conditions are
pad surface. If there is any leakage air bag related fuse(s) when the
normal and are not hazardous. ignition key is in the "ON" posi-
from the air freshener onto these However, the fine dust generated
areas (Instrument cluster, instru- tion. Failure to heed this warning
during airbag deployment may will cause the SRS SRI to illumi-
ment panel pad or air ventilator), it cause skin irritation. Wash your
may damage these parts. If the liq- nate.
hands and face thoroughly with
uid from air freshener does leak lukewarm water and a mild soap
onto these areas, wash them with after an accident in which the
water immediately. airbags were deployed.
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
41

B990A04Y-GAT B990B04Y-GAT
PASSENGER PRESENCE Side Impact Airbag (If installed)
DETECTION (If installed) ! WARNING:
The Passenger Presence Detection
The passenger presence detection
system is not intended to prevent
system detects the presence of a pas-
airbag deployment while a child is
senger in the right front seat. If no
in the front passenger's seat. It is
passenger is recognized on the front
intended only as a means to reduce
passenger seat, the deployment of the
unnecessary collision damage re-
front passenger and/or side airbag and
pair expense by preventing airbag
seat belt pretensioner will be prevented.
and seat belt pretensioner deploy-
This system is designed to prevent the
ment when the right front passen-
replacement of airbag components that
ger seat is unoccupied. Deployment
deploy needlessly in an accident.
is still possible if only a few pounds B990B02Y

are placed upon the seat. There- Your Hyundai is equipped with a side
NOTE: fore, children must not be trans- Impact airbag in each front seat. The
Luggage or other cargo heavier than ported in the front seat. All children purpose of the airbag is to provide the
15 kg should not be placed on the must be seated in the rear seat and vehicle's driver and/or the front pas-
passenger front seat. This can al- properly restrained with the senger with additional protection than
low the deployment of the front vehicle's restraint system or a child that offered by the seat belt alone. The
passenger and/or side air bag in restraint system appropriate for the side impact airbags are designed to
the case of an accident. child's size and weight. deploy only during certain side impact
collisions, depending on the crash se-
verity, angle, speed and point of im-
pact. The side Impact airbags are not
designed to deploy in all side impact
situations.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
42

ploying side airbag, both front o To prevent unexpected deploy-

seat occupants should sit in an ment of the side Impact airbag
upright position with the seat that may result in personal in-
belt properly fastened. The jury, avoid impact to the side
driver's hands should be placed airbag sensor when the ignition
on the steering wheel at the 9:00 key is on.
and 3:00 o'clock positions. The
passenger's arms and hands
should be placed on their laps.
Side airbag o Do not use any accessory seat
sensor B990B01E covers. B240C02Y-GAT

o Use of seat covers could reduce SRS Care

or prevent the effectiveness of
! WARNING: the system.
The SRS is virtually maintenance-free
and there are no parts you can safely
o The side impact airbag is supple- o Do not install any accessories on service by yourself. The entire SRS
mental to the driver's and the the side or near the side Impact system must be inspected by an au-
passenger's seat belt systems airbag. thorized Hyundai dealer 10 years after
and is not a substitute for them. o Do not use excessive force on the date that the vehicle was manufac-
Your seat belts must be worn at all the side of the seat. tured.
times while the vehicle is in mo- o Do not place any objects over the
tion. The airbags deploy only in airbag or between the airbag and Any work on the SRS system, such as
certain side impact conditions yourself. removing, installing, repairing, or any
severe enough to cause signifi- o Do not place any objects (an work on the steering wheel must be
cant injury to the vehicle occu- umbrella, bag, etc.) between the performed by a qualified Hyundai tech-
pants. front door and the front seat. nician. Improper handling of the SRS
o For best protection from the side Such objects may become dan- system may result in serious personal
Impact airbag system and to gerous projectiles and cause in- injury.
avoid being injured by the de- jury if the supplemental side Im-
pact airbag deploy.
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
43

o Modification to SRS components o Do not tamper with or discon-

or wiring, including the addition nect SRS wiring, or other com-
of any kind of badges to the pad ponents of the SRS system. Do-
covers or modifications to the ing so could result in injury, due
body structure, can adversely to accidental firing of the airbags
affect SRS performance and lead or by rendering the SRS inopera-
to possible injury. tive.
o For cleaning the airbag pad cov- o If components of the airbag sys-
ers, use only a soft, dry cloth or tem must be discarded, or if the
one which has been moistened vehicle must be scrapped, cer-
B240C01HP with plain water. Solvents or tain safety precautions must be
cleaners could adversely affect observed. Your Hyundai dealer
the airbag covers and proper knows these precautions and can
! WARNING: deployment of the system. give you the necessary informa-
o Extreme Hazard! Do not use a o No objects should be placed over tion. Failure to follow these pre-
rearward facing child restraint or near the airbag modules on cautions and procedures could
on a seat protected by an airbag the steering wheel, instrument increase the risk of personal in-
in front of it! panel, and the front passenger's jury.
o Do not install a child restraint panel above the glove box, be- o If you sell your vehicle, make
system in the front passenger cause any such object could certain that this manual is trans-
seat position. cause harm if the vehicle is in a ferred to the new owner.
A child restraint system must crash severe enough to cause o If your car was flooded and has
never be placed in the front seat. the airbags to inflate. soaked carpeting or water on
The infant or child could be se- o If the airbags inflate, they must flooring, you shouldn't try to start
verely injured by an airbag de- be replaced by an authorized engine; have the car towed to
ployment in case of an accident. Hyundai dealer. authorized Hyundai dealer.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
44 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INDICATOR

B260A03E-GAT
(Without Trip Computer)

1 2 3 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 5 10 1112 13

14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

B260A03E
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
45

1. Trunk Lid (4 door)/Tail Gate (5 door) Open Warning Light 12. Low Fuel Warning Light
2. Traction Control Indicator Light (If installed) 13. Immobilizer Warning Indicator Light (If installed)
3. ABS Warning Light (If installed) 14. Temperature Gauge
4. Tachometer 15. Door Ajar Warning Light
5. Turn Signal Indicator Light 16. Seat Belt Warning Light
6. High Beam Indicator Light 17. SRS (Airbag) Warning Light (If installed)
7. Overdrive Off Indicator Light (1.6L Auto T/A only)/ 18. Odometer/Trip Odometer
Fuel Filter Warning Light (Diesel engine) 19. Low Oil Pressure Warning Light
8. Automatic Transaxle Position Indicator Light (Auto T/A only) 20. Charging System Warning Light
9. Front Fog Indicator Light (If installed) 21. Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level Warning Light
10. Speedometer 22. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) (If installed)
11. Cruise Indicator Light (If installed)/ Diesel pre-heat Indicator 23. Trip Odometer Reset Switch
Light (Diesel engine) 24. Fuel Gauge
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
46

B260B03E-GAT
(With Trip Computer)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 4 9 10

11 12 13 141516 17 181920 21 22 23

B260B03E
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
47

1. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) (If installed) 13. ABS Warning Light (If installed)
2. SRS (Airbag) Warning Light (If installed) 14. Charging System Warning Light
3. Low Oil Pressure Warning Light 15. Seat Belt Warning Light
4. Turn Signal Indicator Light 16. Overdrive Off Indicator Light (1.6L Auto T/A only)/
5. Cruise Indicator Light (If installed) Fuel Filter Warning Light (Diesel engine)
6. Front Fog Indicator Light (If installed) 17. Trip Computer (If installed)
7. High Beam Indicator Light 18. Trunk Lid (4 door)/Tail Gate (5 door) Open Warning Light
8. Diesel Pre-heat Indicator Light (Diesel engine) 19. Door Ajar Warning Light
9. Immobilizer Warning Indicator (If installed) 20. Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level Warning Light
10. Low Fuel Warning Light 21. Traction Control Indicator Light (If installed)
11. Temperature Gauge 22. Speedometer
12. Tachometer 23. Fuel Gauge
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
48 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

B260B01S-GAT B260P01E-GAT
SRS (Airbag) Service ABS Service Reminder If this occurs, avoid sudden stops
Reminder Indicator (SRI) Indicator (SRI) and have your vehicle checked by
(If installed) (If installed) your Hyundai dealer as soon as
possible.
The SRS service reminder indicator When the key is turned to the "ON"
(SRI) comes on and flashes for about position, the Anti-Lock Brake System
6 seconds after the ignition key is SRI will come on and then go off after
turned to the "ON" position or after the three seconds. If the ABS SRI remains B260C01A-AAT
engine is started, after which it will go on, comes on while driving, or does not O/D OFF Indicator
out. come on when the key is turned to the (If installed)
"ON" position, this indicates that there
When the overdrive switch is turned
This light also comes on when the SRS may be a problem with the ABS.
on, the overdrive off indicator will go
is not working properly. If the SRI does If this occurs, have your vehicle
out. This amber indicator will be illumi-
not come on, or continuously remains checked by your Hyundai dealer as
nated when the overdrive switch is
on after flashing for about 6 seconds soon as possible. The normal braking
turned off. (1.6L Auto T/A only)
when you turned the ignition key to the system will still be operational, but
"ON" position or started the engine, or without the assistance of the anti-lock
if it comes on while driving, have the brake system.
SRS inspected by an authorized B260D01A-AAT

Hyundai Dealer. Turn Signal Indicator

! WARNING:
Lights
If the both ABS SRI and Parking The blinking green arrows on the in-
Brake/Brake fluid level warning strument panel show the direction indi-
lights remain "ON" or come on while cated by the turn signals. If the arrow
driving, there may be a problem comes on but does not blink, blinks
with E.B.D. (Electronic Brake Force more rapidly than normal, or does not
Distribution). illuminate at all, a malfunction in the
turn signal system is indicated. Your
dealer should be consulted for repairs.
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
49

B260F01A-AAT
High Beam Indicator If this happens, stop the car as Warning Light Operation
Light soon as it is safe to do so, turn off The parking brake/brake fluid level
the engine and check the oil level. If warning light should come on when the
The high beam indicator light comes the oil level is low, fill the engine oil parking brake is applied and the igni-
on whenever the headlights are to the proper level and start the tion switch is turned to "ON" or
switched to the high beam or flash engine again. If the light stays on "START". After the engine is started,
position. with the engine running, turn the the light should go out when the park-
engine off immediately. In any in- ing brake is released.
stance where the oil light stays on If the parking brake is not applied, the
B260G01A-AAT
Low Oil Pressure when the engine is running, the warning light should come on when the
engine should be checked by an ignition switch is turned to "ON" or
Warning Light authorized Hyundai dealer before "START", then go out when the engine
the car is driven again. starts. If the light comes on at any
other time, you should slow the vehicle
! CAUTION: and bring it to a complete stop in a safe
B260H03A-AAT
If the oil pressure warning light location off the roadway.
Parking Brake/Low Brake The brake warning light indicates that
stays on while the engine is run-
ning, serious engine damage may
Fluid Level Warning Light the brake fluid level in the brake mas-
result. The oil pressure warning ter cylinder is low and hydraulic brake
fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4
light comes on whenever there is
insufficient oil pressure. In normal
! WARNING: specifications should be added. After
operation, it should come on when If you suspect brake trouble, have adding fluid, if no other trouble is found,
the ignition switch is turned on, your brakes checked by a Hyundai the car should be immediately and
then go out when the engine is dealer as soon as possible. Driving carefully driven to a Hyundai dealer for
started. If the oil pressure warning your car with a problem in either the inspection. If further trouble is experi-
light stays on while the engine is brake electrical system or brake hy- enced, the vehicle should not be driven
running, there may be a serious draulic system is dangerous, and at all but taken to a dealer by a
malfunction. could result in a serious injury or professional towing service or some
death. other safe method.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
50

B260J01S-GAT B260E01HP-GAT B260M01A-AAT

Charging System Seat Belt Warning Light Low Fuel Level Warning
Warning Light (If installed) Light
The charging system warning light The seat belt warning light blinks for The low fuel level warning light comes
should come on when the ignition is about 6 seconds when the ignition key on when the fuel tank is approaching
turned on, then go out when the engine is turned from the "OFF" position to empty. When it comes on, you should
is running. If the light stays on while the "ON" or "START". add fuel as soon as possible. Driving
engine is running, there is a malfunc- with the fuel level warning light on or
tion in the electrical charging system. If with the fuel level below "E" can cause
the light comes on while you are driv- B260K01E-AAT the engine to misfire and damage the
ing, stop, turn off the engine and check Trunk Lid (4 door)/ catalytic converter.
under the hood. First, make certain the Tail Gate (5 door) Open
generator drive belt is in place. If it is, Warning Light
check the tension of the belt.
And then, have the system checked by This light remains on unless the trunk B260Q01E-GAT

your Hyundai dealer. lid/tail gate is completely closed and Cruise Indicator Light
latched. (If installed)

The cruise indicator light in the instru-

! CAUTION: B260L01A-GAT ment cluster is illuminated when the
If the drive belt (generator belt) is Door Ajar Warning Light cruise control main switch on the end
loosen, broken, or mission while of the barrel is pushed.
the vehicle is driving, there may be The door ajar warning light warns you The indicator light does not illuminate
a serious malfunction, engine could that a door is not completely closed. when the cruise control main switch is
overheat because this belt also pushed a second time.
drives the water pump. Information about the use of cruise
control is beginning on page 1-84.
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
51

B260A01B-GAT B260C01O-AAT B260U01TB-GAT

Front Fog Indicator Light Traction Control Immobilizer Indicator
(If installed) Indicator Lights Light (If installed)
Front fog indicator light comes on when- (If installed) This indicator light comes on for some
ever the fog light switch is on. The traction control indicators change seconds after the ignition key is turned
operation according to the ignition to the "ON" position. At this time, you
switch position and whether the sys- can start the engine. The light goes out
B260N01A-GAT tem is in operation or not. after the engine is running. In case this
Malfunction Indicator They will illuminate when the ignition light goes out before you start the
Light (If installed) key is turned to the "ON" position, but engine, you must turn to the "LOCK"
should go out after three seconds. If position and restart the engine. In case
This light illuminates when there is a this light blinks for five seconds when
the TCS or TCS-OFF indicator stays
malfunction of an exhaust gas related the ignition key is turned to "ON" posi-
on, take your car to your authorized
component, and the system is not tion, this indicates that the immobilizer
Hyundai dealer and have the system
functioning properly so that the ex- system is out of order. At this time,
checked. See section 2 for more infor-
haust gas regulation values are not refer to the explanation of the Limp
mation about the TCS.
satisfied. This light will also illuminate home procedure(See page 1-6) or con-
when the ignition key is turned to the sult to the Hyundai dealer.
"ON" position, and then it will go out in
a few seconds. If it illuminates while
driving, or does not illuminate when the
ignition key is turned to the "ON" posi-
tion, take your car to your nearest
authorized Hyundai dealer and have the
system checked.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
52

B260S01B-GAT B265A01E-GAT B270A01A-AAT

Diesel Pre-heat Indicator Fuel Filter Warning Light BRAKE PAD WEAR WARNING
Light SOUND
The indicator light illuminates amber This light illuminates when the ignition The front disc brake pads have wear
when the ignition switch is placed at switch is set to the "ON" position and indicators that should make a high-
the "ON" position. The engine can be goes off after the engine has started. If pitched squealing or scraping noise
started after the pre-heat indicator light it lights up while the engine is running, when new pads are needed. The sound
goes off. The illuminating time varies it indicates that water has accumu- may come and go or be heard all the
with the water temperature, air tem- lated inside the fuel filter. If this hap- time when the vehicle is moving. It
perature and battery condition. pens, remove the water from the fuel may also be heard when the brake
filter. (Refer to "6-35 page") pedal is pushed down firmly. Exces-
NOTE: sive rotor damage will result if the worn
If the engine were not started 10 pads are not replaced. See your
seconds after the preheating is com- Hyundai dealer immediately.
pleted, turn the ignition key once
more to the "LOCK" position, and
then to the "ON" position, in order
to preheat again.
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 53

B280A01A-AAT B290A02E-AAT
FUEL GAUGE ENGINE COOLANT
Without Trip Computer TEMPERATURE GAUGE ! WARNING:
Without Trip Computer Never remove the radiator cap when
the engine is hot. The engine cool-
ant is under pressure and could
erupt and cause severe burns. Wait
until the engine is cool before re-
moving the radiator cap.

The needle on the engine coolant tem-

HXDFL291 perature gauge should stay in the
HXDFL290
middle between "H" and "C". If it moves
With Trip Computer across the dial to "H" (Hot), pull over
With Trip Computer and stop as soon as possible and turn
off the engine. Then open the hood
and, after the engine has cooled, check
the coolant level and the water pump
drive belt. If you suspect cooling sys-
tem trouble, have your cooling system
checked by a Hyundai dealer as soon
as possible.

HXDFL284

The needle on the gauge indicates the HXDFL283

approximate fuel level in the fuel tank.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
54

B300A01A-GAT B330A01L-AAT The tachometer registers the speed of

SPEEDOMETER TACHOMETER your engine in revolutions per minute
Without Trip Computer Without Trip Computer (rpm).

! CAUTION:
The engine should not be raced to
such a speed that the needle enters
the red zone on the tachometer face.
This can cause severe engine dam-
Gasoline Diesel age and may void your warranty.
HXDFL030 B330A01E

With Trip Computer With Trip Computer

Gasoline Diesel
HXDFL029 B330B01E

Your Hyundai's speedometer is cali-

brated in kilometers per hour or miles
per hour.
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
55

B310B03E-GAT
Function Of Digital Odometer/
ODOMETER/TRIP ODOMETER Trip Odometer
Without Trip Computer
Pushing in the reset switch under the
right side of the speedometer when the
ignition switch is turned "ON" will dis-
play the following sequence:

Reset Switch B310B03E

HXDFL231 1. Odometer
The odometer records the total driving
Odometer distance in kilometers or miles.
Records the total distance the vehicle
2,3. Trip odometer
has been driven.
It is normal for a new vehicle to have Records the distance of 2 trips in kilo-
HXDFL077-1
the odometer indicating less than 50 meters or miles.
km. TRIP A: First distance you have trav-
eled from your origination
NOTE: point to a first destination.
Any alteration of the odometer may TRIP B: Second distance from the first
void your warranty coverage. destination to the final desti-
nation.
To shift from TRIP A to TRIP B, press
the reset switch. When pressed for 1
second, it will reset to 0.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
56 TRIP COMPUTER

B310A01S-GAT B400B03E-GAT
TRIPMETER
ODOMETER (If installed)
With Trip Computer AVERAGE FUEL CONSUMPTION

DISTANCE TO EMPTY

1. Tripmeter

Tripmeter
Odometer
HXDFL230 HXDFL371-1

The odometer records the total driving The trip computer is a microcomputer-
distance in kilometers or miles, and is controlled driver information gauge that
useful for keeping a record for mainte- displays information related to driving,
nance intervals. such as a tripmeter, average fuel con-
sumption and distance to empty on the
NOTE: LCD.
Any alteration of the odometer may Odometer
void your warranty coverage. Trip Computer Switch HXDFL230A

o The trip computer switch is used to o This mode indicates the total dis-
zero the multi-functional display tance travelled since the last
mode. tripmeter reset. Total distance is
o Pushing in the trip computer switch also reset to zero if the battery is
behind the left side of the steering disconnected.
wheel changes the display as fol-
lows;
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
57

o Pressing the trip computer switch 3. Distance to Empty Distance to empty FLASHING
for more than 1 second, when the
Distance to empty symbol Distance to empty symbol
tripmeter is being displayed, clears
the tripmeter to zero. Distance to empty
o The meter's working range is from
0 to 999.9 kms.

2. Average Fuel Consumption

Average fuel consumption Odometer

Odometer HXDFL1026

HXDFL230B
NOTE:
o This mode indicates the estimated o The distance to empty can differ
distance to empty from the current from the actual tripmeter ac-
fuel in the fuel tank and distance to cording to driving conditions.
empty symbol. o The distance to empty can vary
o When refueling with more than 8 according to the driving condi-
Odometer liters, the trip computer will recog- tions, driving pattern or vehicle
HXDFL230C
nize refueling. speed.
o This mode calculates the average o For an accurate distance to empty,
fuel consumption from the total fuel drive more than 500 m.
used and the distance since the last o When the distance to empty is less
average consumption reset. than 50 km, the symbol will always
o The total fuel used is calculated come on and the distance to empty
from the fuel consumption input. digits will indicate "----" with flash
o For an accurate calculation, drive until more fuel is added.
more than 500 m.
o The meter's working range is from
0.0 to 99.9 L/100 km.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
58 MULTI-FUNCTION LIGHT SWITCH

B340A01A-AAT B340B01A-AAT B340C03E-AAT

COMBINATION TURN SIGNAL, Lane Change Signal Headlight Switch
HEADLIGHT AND HIGH-BEAM
SWITCH
Turn Signal Operation
Pulling down on the lever causes the
turn signals on the left side of the car to
blink. Pushing upwards on the lever
causes the turn signals on the right
side of the car to blink. As the turn is
completed, the lever will automatically
return to the center position and turn
off the turn signals at the same time. If HXDFL352 HXDFL360

either turn signal indicator light blinks To indicate a lane change, move the To operate the headlights, turn the
more rapidly than usual, goes on but lever up or down to a point where it barrel on the end of the multi-function
does not blink, or does not go on at all, begins flashing. switch. The first position turns on the
there is a malfunction in the system. The lever will automatically return to parking lights, sidelights, tail lights and
Check for a burned-out fuse or bulb or the center position when released. instrument panel lights. The second
see your Hyundai dealer. position turns on the headlights.

NOTE:
The ignition must be in the "ON"
position to turn on the headlights.

Parking Light Auto Off

If you do not turn the parking lights
"OFF" after driving, the parking light
will automatically shut "OFF" when the
driver's door is opened.
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
59

To turn them "ON" again you must B340E01A-AAT B340G01LZ-GAT

simply turn the ignition key to the "ON" Headlight Flasher Auto Light (If installed)
position.

B340D01A-AAT
High-beam Switch
To turn on the headlight high beams,
push the lever forward (away from
you). The high beam indicator light will
come on at the same time. For low
beams, pull the lever back toward you.
HXDFL351 HXDFL361

To flash the headlights, pull the switch To operate the automatic light feature,
lever toward you, then release it. The turn the barrel on the end of the multi-
B340F01A-GAT
headlights can be flashed even though function switch. If you set the multi-
Daytime Running Lights the headlight switch is in the "OFF" function switch to "AUTO", the tail
(If installed) position. lights and headlights will be turned
Your Hyundai is equipped with day- automatically on or off according to
time running lights. The daytime run- external illumination conditions.
ning lights are used to improve visibil-
ity for oncoming traffic. Your vehicle NOTE:
daytime running lights are designed to Switch on car light manually in foggy,
remain on continuously when the en- cloudy and rainy conditions.
gine is operating even though the head-
light switch is in the "OFF" position.
However, the daytime running lights
will be off while the parking brake is
applied.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
60 WINDSHIELD WIPER AND
WASHER SWITCH
B360B01L-GAT B350A01L-AAT ice, operate the heater in the defrost
Front Fog Light Switch mode to melt the snow or ice before
(If installed) using the wiper.

1
B350C01S-AAT
2 Adjustable Intermittent Wiper
3 Operation

HXDFL353

The windshield wiper switch has three

HXDFL359
positions:
To turn on the front fog lights, place the
switch in the "ON" position. They will 1. Intermittent wiper operation
come on when the headlight switch is 2. Low-speed operation
in the first or second position. 3. High-speed operation

NOTE: HXDFL354
To prevent damage to the wiper
To use the intermittent wiper feature,
system, do not attempt to wipe away
place the wiper switch in the "INT"
heavy accumulations of snow or
position. With the switch in this posi-
ice. Accumulated snow and ice
tion, the interval between wipes can be
should be removed manually. If
varied from approximately 2 to 10 sec-
there is only a light layer of snow or
onds by turning the interval adjuster
barrel.
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
61

B350B01A-AAT o In areas where water freezes in B390A01E-AAT

Windshield Washer Operation winter, use windshield washer Rear Window Wiper And Washer
antifreeze. (If installed)

Mist Wiper Operation

HXDFL355

To use the windshield washer, pull the HXDFL357

wiper/washer lever toward the steer- 1. : The rear window wiper starts
ing wheel. When the washer lever is HXDFL356-EU to operate three times after the
operated, the wipers automatically washer fluid sprays onto the
make two passes across the wind- If a single wipe is desired to clear mist, rear window.
shield. The washer continues to oper- push the windshield wiper and washer 2.OFF
ate until the lever is released. control lever upwards. 3.INT: The interval between wipes op-
erates every 5 seconds inter-
NOTE: mittently.
o Do not operate the washer more 4.ON : The rear window wiper starts
than 15 seconds at a time or when to operate continuously.
the fluid reservoir is empty. 5. :The washer fluid will be sprayed
o In icy or freezing weather, be onto the rear window and the
sure the wiper blades are not wiper operates while the rear
frozen to the glass prior to oper- window wiper barrel is placed
ating the wipers. in this position.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
62 REAR FOG LIGHT SWITCH HEADLIGHT WASHER
SWITCH
Do not operate the washer continu- B360A01Y-GAT B345G01E-GAT

ously for more than 15 seconds or (If installed) (If installed)

when the fluid reservoir is empty; this
could damage the system. Do not op-
erate the wiper when the window is
dry; this can result in scratching as well
as premature wiper blade wear.
For the reason stated above,do not
operate the washer when the washer
fluid reservoir is empty.

B360A02E B345H01E

To turn on the rear fog lights, push the

switch. They will come on when the
headlight switch is in the second posi-
tion and the key is in the "ON" position.

B345G01E
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER 63
SWITCH
The headlight washer switch can be B380A02A-AAT
NOTE:
operated with the ignition switch at the The ignition must be in the "ON"
"ON" position and the light switch at position for the rear window defroster
the "ON" position. Push the button and to operate.
the washer fluid will be sprayed on to
the headlights for about 0.7 second.

NOTE: ! CAUTION:
Check the headlight washers peri- Do not clean the inner side of the
odically to confirm that the washer rear window glass with an abrasive
fluid is being sprayed properly onto type of glass cleaner or use a scraper
the headlight lenses. B380B01E to remove foreign deposits from the
inner surface of the glass as this may
The rear window defroster and heated cause damage to the defroster ele-
outside rearview mirrors are turned on ments.
by pushing in the switch. To turn the
defroster off, push the switch a second
time. The rear window defroster auto-
matically turns itself off after about 15
minutes. To restart the defroster cycle,
push in the switch again after it has
turned itself off.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
64 HAZARD WARNING SYSTEM DIGITAL CLOCK TICKET HOLDER

B370A01A-AAT B400A01E-AAT B590A01E-AAT

HXDFL371 HXDFL400-1 HXDFL240

The hazard warning system should be There are three control buttons for the For your convenience, it may be used
used whenever you find it necessary digital clock. Their functions are: for holding a tollgate ticket.
to stop the car in a hazardous location. HOUR -Push "H" to advance the hour
When you must make such an emer-
indicated.
gency stop, always pull off the road as
MIN -Push "M" to advance the
far as possible. minute indicated.
The hazard warning lights are turned
RESET - Push "R" to reset minutes to
on by pushing in the hazard switch.
":00" to facilitate resetting the
This causes all turn signal lights to clock to the correct time.
blink. The hazard warning lights will
When this is done:
operate even though the key is not in
the ignition. Pressing "R" between 10 : 30 and 11 :
To turn the hazard warning lights off, 29 changes the readout to 11 : 00.
push the switch a second time. Pressing "R" between 11 : 30 and 12 :
29 changes the readout to 12 : 00.
Push the "R" buttion for 5 seconds to
display a 12- or 24-hour clock (If in-
stalled).
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
INSTRUMENT PANEL LIGHT CIGARETTE LIGHTER 65
CONTROL (RHEOSTAT)
B410A01A-AAT B420A02A-AAT
(If installed)
! CAUTION:
Do not use electric accessories or
equipment other than the Hyundai
genuine parts in the socket.

HXDFL420
B410A01E
For the cigarette lighter to work, the
The instrument panel lights can be key must be in the "ACC" position or
made brighter or dimmer by turning the the "ON" position.
instrument panel light control knob. To use the cigarette lighter, push it all
the way into its socket. When the
element has heated, the lighter will
pop out to the "ready" position.
Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressed
in. This can damage the heating ele-
ment and create a fire hazard.
If it is necessary to replace the ciga-
rette lighter, use only a genuine Hyundai
replacement or its approved equiva-
lent.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
66 POWER OUTLET ASHTRAY

B500D08O-AAT B430A01B-AAT
Front Ashtray
! CAUTION:
o Use the power outlet only when
the engine is running and remove
the plug from the power outlet
after using the electric device.
Using when the engine stops or
keeping the electric device with
plugged in for many hours may
cause the battery to discharge.
o Do not use the power outlet to
HXDFL421
connect electric accessories or
These supply 12V electric power to equipment that are not designed HXDFL440

operate electric accessories or equip- to operate on 12 volts. The front ashtray may be opened by
ment only when the key is in the "ON" o Some electronic devices can cause pushing and releasing the ashtray lid.
or "ACC" position. electronic interference when To remove the ashtray to empty or
plugged into the power outlet. clean it, lift the metal ash receptacle
These devices may cause exces- upward and pull it out. The ashtray
sive audio noise and malfunctions light will only illuminate when the exter-
in other electronic systems or de- nal lights are on (If installed).
vices in your vehicle.
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
PARKING BRAKE DRINK HOLDER 67

B440A01E-AAT B530A01A-AAT B450A01E-AAT

Rear Ashtray Front Drink Holder

B530A01E
B430A01E HXDOM120
Always engage the parking brake be-
The rear ashtray may be opened by fore leaving the car. This also turns on The front drink holder for holding cups is
pulling the lid out by its top edge. To the parking brake indicator light when located on the right side of the parking
remove the ashtray to empty or clean the key is in the "ON" or "START" brake.
it, press down on the spring-loaded tab position. Before driving away, be sure
inside the ashtray and lift the ashtray that the parking brake is fully released
upward and pull it all the way out. and the indicator light is off.

o To engage the parking brake, pull

the lever up as far as possible.
o To release the parking brake, pull
up the lever and press the thumb
button. Then, while holding the but-
ton in, lower the brake lever.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
68 REAR SEAT ARM REST

B450B03E-AAT The rear drink holder for holding cups is B611A02L-AAT

Rear Drink Holder (If installed) located in the rear seat center (center of (If installed)
4 DOOR the rear seat arm rest- 5 door). The drink
holder can be used by pushing it in first
and then releasing it.

! CAUTION:
Place the drink holder in its stored
position while not in use.
HXDOM302 HXDOM210

5 DOOR The rear seat arm rest is located in the

! WARNING:
center of the rear seat back. A storage
box is included for convenience (If
o Use caution when using the drink installed).
holders. A spilled beverage that is
very hot can injure you or your
passengers. Spilled liquids can
damage interior trim and electri-
cal components.
o Do not place objects other than
cups or cans in the drink holder.
HXDFL1033 These objects can be thrown out
in the event of a sudden stop or an
accident, possibly injuring the pas-
sengers in the vehicle.
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
SEATBACK HEADLIGHT LEVELING 69
DEVICE SYSTEM
B540A02TB-GAT B340G01S-GAT
HOLDER (If installed)
(If installed) ! WARNING:
Do not use when the passenger
(especially the child) is in the rear
seat, as the seatback holder could
result in serious injury to the pas-
senger in the event of an accident
or sudden stop.

B540B01E-GAT
POCKET B340G02E

HXDFL1034 (If installed) To adjust the headlight beam level

There is a front passenger seatback according to the number of the pas-
holder to hang a shopping bag. sengers and the loading weight in the
luggage area, turn the beam leveling
switch.
! CAUTION
The higher the number of the switch
position, the lower the headlight beam
o Do not hang a bag beyond 3 kg. level. Always keep the headlight beam
It may cause damage to the at the proper leveling position, or head-
seatback holder. lights may dazzle other road users.
o Return it to the original position
after using the seatback holder.
HXDFL536

The seatback pockets for holding pa-

pers are located on the backside of the
front seats.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
70 SUNROOF

Listed below are the examples of proper B460A01S-AAT B460B03E-AAT

switch settings. For loading conditions (If installed) OPERATING THE SUNROOF
other than those listed below, adjust The sunroof can be operated with the SYSTEM
the switch position so that the beam ignition key in the "ON" position Opening or Closing the Sunroof
level may be the nearest as the condi-
tion obtained according to the list.
B470A02S-AAT
SUNSHADE
Loading condition Switch position
Driver only 0
Driver + front passenger 0
Full passengers
1
(including driver)
Full passengers (includ-
ing driver) + full trunk B460B02E
2
loading (or light trailer The sunroof can be electrically opened
loading) or closed with the ignition key in the
Driver + full trunk load- B470A01E
"ON" position. The sunroof is moved to
ing (or maximum trailer its fully open position by pushing and
3 The sunshade can be opened and holding the "OPEN" button. Release
loading) closed by sliding it forward or rearward the button when the sunroof reaches
when the sunroof is closed. The sun- the desired position. To close, press
shade will be opened automatically and hold the "CLOSE" button.
when the sunroof is opened, but it
must be closed manually.

! WARNING:
Never adjust the sunshade while
driving.
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
71

B460C02E-AAT B460D03E-AAT
Tilting the Sunroof Manual Operation of Sunroof
! CAUTION: If the sunroof does not operate electri-
o Do not open the sunroof in se- cally:
verely cold temperature or when it
is covered with ice or snow.
o Periodically remove any dirt that
may have accumulated on the
guide rails.
o Do not press any sunroof control
button longer than necessary.
Damage to the motor or system
components could occur.
B460C02E

The sunroof can be tilted by pushing

the "UP" button with the sunroof closed.
B460D02E
Release the button when the sunroof
reaches the desired position. To close 1. Remove the rectangular plastic inte-
! WARNING: the sunroof, press the "DOWN" but- rior light lenses in the front overhead
o Do not close a sunroof if anyone's ton. console by using a flat blade screw-
hands, arms or body are between driver as shown.
the sliding glass and the sunroof NOTE:
sash, as this could result in injury. After washing the car or after there
o Do not place your head or arms is rain, be sure to wipe off any water
out of the sunroof opening at any that is on the sunroof before oper-
time. ating it.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
72 INTERIOR LIGHT

B480A01E-AAT
FRONT INTERIOR LIGHT
Map Light (If installed)

With Sunroof Without Sunroof

B460E02E B460F02E

2. Remove the mounting screws of the 3. Insert the hexagonal head wrench
front overhead console with a flat provided with the vehicle into the
B480A02E
blade screwdriver. socket. This wrench can be found in
the vehicle's trunk or glove box. The two map light buttons are located
4. Turn the wrench clockwise to open on both sides of the front overhead
or counterclockwise to close. console. Push in the map light button
to turn the light on or off. This light
produces a spot beam for convenient
use as a map light at night or as a
personal light for the driver and the
passenger.
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
SPECTACLE CASE 73

B490A03E-AAT
NOTE: B491A02F-GAT
Interior light If your vehicle is equipped with the (If installed)
delay-out interior light, the light
goes out gradually within 6 sec-
onds after the door is closed.

o ON
In the "ON" position, the light stays on
at all times.

! CAUTION:
B490B01E HXDOM241
Do not leave the switch in this posi-
The interior courtesy light has a switch tion for an extended period time The spectacle case is located on the
of three positions. The three positions when the vehicle is not running. front overhead console.
are: Push the end of the cover to open the
spectacle case.
o DR o OFF
In the "DR" position, the interior cour- In the "OFF" position, the light stays off
tesy light comes on when any door is at all times even though a door is open. ! WARNING:
opened regardless of the ignition key Do not open the spectacle case
position. The light goes out when the while the vehicle is moving. The
door is closed. rear view mirror of the vehicle can
be blocked by an open spectacle
case.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
74 GLOVE BOX MULTI BOX MIRROR

B500A01S-AAT B500B02E-GAT B510A01S-AAT

OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
Manual Type

B500A01E HXD301

The multi box may be opened by pull-

! WARNING:
ing it out by its grip.
It is used for storing small articles.
B510A01E

The outside rearview mirror on the

To avoid the possibility of injury in If the muti box is removed, the fuse box driver's side is equipped with a remote
case of an accident or a sudden for the lights and other electrical ac- control for your convenience. It is op-
stop, the glove box door should be cessories will be exposed. erated by the control lever in the bot-
kept closed when the car is in mo- tom front corner of the window.
tion. Before driving away, always check
that your mirrors are positioned so you
o To open the glove box, pull on the can see behind you, both to the left and
glove box release lever. right sides, as well as directly behind
o The glove box door can be locked your vehicle. When using the mirror,
(and unlocked) with the key (If in- always exercise caution when attempt-
stalled). ing to judge the distance of vehicles
behind or along side of you.
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
75

NOTE: The outside rearview mirrors can be

If the mirror control is jammed with
ice, do not attempt to break it free
adjusted to your preferred rear vision,
both directly behind the vehicle, and to
! CAUTION:
using the control handle or by ma- the rear of the left and right sides. o Do not operate the switch con-
nipulating the face of the mirror. The remote control outside rearview tinuously for an unnecessary
Use an approved spray de-icer (not mirror switch controls the adjustments length of time.
radiator antifreeze) to release the for both right and left outside mirrors. o Scraping ice from the mirror face
frozen mechanism or move the ve- could cause permanent damage.
hicle to warm place and allow the To adjust the position of either To remove any ice, use a sponge,
ice to melt. mirror: soft cloth or approved de-icer.

1. Move the selecting switch to the

right or left to activate the adjustable
B510B01Y-AAT
mechanism for the corresponding
Electric Type (If installed) door mirror.
2. Adjust mirror angle by depressing ! WARNING:
the appropriate directional switch Be careful when judging the size or
as illustrated. distance of any object seen in the
passenger side rear view mirror. It
is a convex mirror with a curved
surface, and objects seen in this
mirror are closer than they appear.

B510C01E

B510D01E
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
76

B510D01Y-AAT B510C01A-AAT B520A01A-AAT

OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR FOLDING THE OUTSIDE REAR- DAY/NIGHT INSIDE REARVIEW
HEATER (If installed) VIEW MIRRORS MIRROR
Manual Type

B380B01E B510E01E

The outside rearview mirror heater is To fold the outside rearview mirrors, HXDFL2112

actuated in connection with the rear push them towards the rear. Your Hyundai is equipped with a day/
window defroster. To heat the outside The outside rearview mirrors can be night inside rearview mirror. The "night"
rearview mirror glass, push in the switch folded rearward for parking in narrow position is selected by flipping the tab
for the rear window defroster. The areas. at the bottom of the mirror toward you.
rearview mirror glass will be heated for In the "night" position, the glare of
headlights of cars behind you is re-
defrosting or defogging and will give
you improved rear vision in inclement
! WARNING: duced.
weather conditions. Push the switch Do not adjust or fold the outside
again to turn the heater off. The out- rearview mirrors while the vehicle
side rearview mirror heater automati- is moving. This could result in loss
cally turns itself off after 15 minutes. of control, and an accident which
could cause death, serious injury
or property damage.
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
SUN VISOR 77

B580A01L-GAT
B520B02O-GAT
NOTE:
Electric type (If installed) (If installed) The Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) label containing useful infor-
mation can be found on the back of
each sun visor.

! WARNING:
Do not place the sun visor in such a
Vanity mirror manner that it obscures visibility of
Sensor the roadway, traffic or other objects.
HLZ2068-1 B580A01E

The electric type day/night inside rear- Your Hyundai is equipped with sun
view mirror automatically controls the visors to give the driver and front pas-
glare of headlights of the car behind senger either frontal or sideward shade.
you. To reduce glare or to shut out direct
rays of the sun, turn the sun visor down.
1. Pressing the button turns the A vanity mirror is provided on the back
auto-dimming function OFF which is of the sun visor for the driver and front
indicated by the green Status Indica- passenger.
tor LED turning off.
2. Pressing the button again turns
the auto-dimming function ON which
is indicated by the green Status Indi-
cator LED turning on.
NOTE:
The mirror defaults to the "ON" posi-
tion each time the vehicle is started.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
78 HIGH-MOUNTED REAR STOP FRONT DOOR EDGE HOOD RELEASE
LIGHT WARNING LIGHT
B550A01S-GAT B620A01S-AAT B570A02E-GAT
(If installed) (If installed)

HXD570
B550A02E B620A01E
1. Pull the release knob to unlatch the
In addition to the lower-mounted rear A red light comes on when the front hood.
stop lights on either side of the car, the door is opened. The purpose of this
high mounted rear stop light in the light is to assist when you get in or out
center of the rear window or inserted in and also to warn passing vehicles.
the rear spoiler also lights when the
brakes are applied.

HXDFL570
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
REMOTE FUEL-FILLER LID 79
RELEASE
2. Pull the secondary latch lever up and B560A02HP-AAT

lift the hood.

3. Hold the hood open with the support
! WARNING:
4 DOOR

rod. o Always double check to be sure

that the hood is firmly latched
Before closing the hood, return the before driving away. If it is not
support rod to its clip to prevent it from latched, the hood could open
rattling. Lower the hood until it is about while the vehicle is being driven,
30 cm (1 ft.) above the closed position causing a total loss of visibility,
and let it drop. Make sure that it locks which might result in an acci-
into place. dent.
o The support rod must be inserted 5 DOOR
HXDFL561
completely into the hole provided
! CAUTION:
in the hood whenever you in- The fuel-filler lid may be opened from
spect the engine compartment. inside the vehicle by pulling up on the
Make sure that the support rod has
This will prevent the hood from fuel-filler lid opener located on the front
been released prior to closing the
falling and possibly injuring you. floor area on the left side of the car.
hood.
o Do not move the vehicle with the
hood in the raised position, as NOTE:
vision is obstructed and the hood If the fuel-filler lid will not open
could fall or be damaged. because ice has formed around it,
tap lightly or push on the lid to
break the ice and release the lid. Do
not pry on the lid. If necessary,
spray around the lid with an ap-
proved de-icer fluid (do not use
radiator anti-freeze) or move the
vehicle to a warm place and allow
the ice to melt.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
80

o Automotive fuels are flammable/ - Do not use cellular phones

explosive materials. When refuel- around a gas station. The elec-
ing, please note the following tric current or electronic inter-
guidelines carefully. ference from cellular phones
- Before touching the fuel nozzle can ignite fuel vapors and cause
or fuel filler cap, have one's a fire.
hands in contact with metal - When refueling, always turn the
parts away from the filler neck engine off. Sparks by electrical
to discharge static electricity. equipment of the engine can
- Do not get back in the vehicle ignite fuel vapors causing a
B560B01E while refueling. Do not operate fire. After refueling, check to
anything that can produce static make sure the fuel filler cap is
electricity. Static electricity dis- securely closed, and then start
! WARNING:
charge can ignite fuel vapors
resulting in an explosion.
the engine.
- Do not smoke or try to light
o Fuel vapors are dangerous. Be- - When using a portable fuel con- cigarettes around a gas station.
fore refueling, always stop the en- tainer, be sure to place the con- Automotive fuels are flam-
gine and never allow sparks or tainer on the ground while refu- mable.
open flames near the filler area. If eling. Static electricity dis-
you need to replace the filler cap, charge from the container can
use a genuine Hyundai replace- ignite fuel vapors causing a
ment part. fire. While starting refueling,
If you open the fuel filler cap dur- contact should be maintained
ing high ambient temperatures, a until the filling is complete.
slight "pressure sound" may be
heard. This is normal and not a
cause for concern.
Whenever you open the fuel filler
cap, turn it slowly.
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
TRUNK LID / TAIL GATE 81

B540A01E-GAT B540C01S-AAT B540E01A-GAT

TRUNK LID (4 DOOR) To Unlock Using the Key Trunk Lid Emergency Latch
Remote Trunk Lid Release Release (If installed)

B540C02E

B540A02E To open the trunk lid, insert the key B540E02E

To open the trunk lid without using the and turn it clockwise to unlock. The NOTE
key, pull up the lid release lever. trunk compartment light illuminates o If a person is locked in the trunk,
To close, lower the trunk lid, then when the trunk lid is opened. he may pull the red painted lever
press down on it until it locks. To be on the inside latch cover. This
sure the trunk lid is securely fastened, will open the trunk lid.
check by trying to pull it up again. o We're recommending that cars
be kept locked and keys be kept
out of the reach of children, and
that parents teach their children
about the dangers of playing in
trunks.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
82 LUGGAGE NET

B540F03E-GAT B540D01E-GAT
TAIL GATE (5 DOOR) Storage Box (If installed)
Operation From Outside The
Vehicle

HXDFL035 HXDFL1025-1

The storage box is located in the right When loading objects in the luggage
B540F02E side of the luggage compartment floor. compartment, use the four rings lo-
To open the tail gate, only need the key cated in the luggage compartment floor
if the tailgate is locked. If the tailgate is to attach the luggage net as shown
unlocked, pull the outside handle to- ! WARNING:
illustration. This will help prevent the
ward you. objects from sliding.
The trunk lid/tail gate should al-
ways be kept completely closed
while the vehicle is in motion. If it is
left open or ajar, poisonous ex-
haust gases may enter the car re-
sulting in serious illness or death
to the occupants. See additional
warnings concerning exhaust
gases on page 2-2.
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
STEERING WHEEL TILT HORN 83
LEVER
B600A01A-AAT B610B01A-GAT
(If installed) (Without Airbag)
! CAUTION:
To prevent damage to the goods or
the vehicle, care should be taken
when carrying fragile or bulky ob-
jects in the trunk.

! WARNING: HXDFL600 B610B01E

Avoid eye injury. DO NOT overstretch Press the center hub of the steering
To Adjust the Steering Wheel:
the luggage net. ALWAYS keep your wheel to sound the horn.
face and body out of its recoil path. 1. Push the lever downward to unlock.
DO NOT use when the strap has 2. Raise or lower the steering wheel to
visible signs of wear or damage. the desired position.
3. After adjustment, securely tighten
the lever by pulling it upward.

! WARNING:
Do not attempt to adjust the steer-
ing wheel while driving as this may
result in loss of control of the ve-
hicle which may cause serious in-
jury or death.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
84 CRUISE CONTROL
B610A01S-GAT B660A01S-GAT B660B01E-GAT
(With Airbag) (If installed) To Set the Cruise Speed

Main Switch

B610A01E B660A01E B660B01E

Press the pad on the steering wheel to The cruise control system provides 1. Push in the cruise control main
sound the horn. automatic speed control for your com- switch on the end of the barrel. The
fort when driving on freeways, tollroads, "CRUISE" indicator light in the in-
or other noncongested highways. This strument cluster will be illuminated.
is designed to function above approxi- This turns the system on.
mately 40 km/h (25 mph). 2. Accelerate to the desired cruising
speed above 40 km/h (25 mph).
3. Push the control switch downward
to "SET (COAST)" and release it.
4. Remove your foot from the accel-
erator pedal and the desired speed
will automatically be maintained.
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
85

5. To increase speed, depress the ac- B660C03E-AAT B660D01E-AAT

celerator pedal enough for the ve- To Cancel the Cruise Speed To Resume the Preset Speed
hicle to exceed the preset speed.
When you remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal, the vehicle will
return to the speed you have set.

! WARNING:
To avoid accidental cruise control
engagement, keep the cruise control B660C01E B660D01E
main switch off when not using the
cruise control. To disengage the cruise control sys- The vehicle will automatically resume
tem, pull the control switch toward the the speed set prior to cancellation when
steering wheel to the "CANCEL" posi- you push the control switch upward to
tion. Additionally, the following actions the "RESUME (ACCEL)" position and
will disengage the system: release it, providing the vehicle speed
is above 40 km/h (25 mph).
o Depress the brake pedal.
o Depress the clutch pedal (Manual B660E01E-AAT
transaxle). To Reset at a Faster Speed
o Shift the selector lever to "P" or "N"
position (Automatic transaxle). 1. Push the control switch upward to
o Decrease the vehicle speed to less the "RESUME (ACCEL)" position
than 40 km/h (25 mph). and hold it.
o Release the main switch. 2. Accelerate to desired speed and
release the control switch. While
the control switch is held, the ve-
hicle will gradually gain speed.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
86

B660F02E-AAT
To Reset at a Slower Speed o With the cruise control engaged,
! WARNING: when the brake pedal is applied,
o Keep the main switch off when it is normal to hear the cruise
not using the cruise control. control system deactivate. This
o Use the cruise control system is an indication of normal system
only when traveling on open high- operation.
ways in good weather. o During normal cruise control
o Do not use the cruise control operation, when the "SET
when it may not be safe to keep (COAST)" is activated or reacti-
the car at a constant speed, for vated after applying the brakes,
instance, driving in heavy or vary- the cruise control will energize
ing traffic, or on slippery (rainy, after approximately 3 seconds.
B660B01E
icy or snow-covered) or winding This delay is normal.
1. Push the control switch downward roads or over 6% up-hill or down-
to "SET (COAST)" and hold it. The hill roads.
vehicle will decelerate. o Pay particular attention to the
2. When the desired speed is obtained, driving conditions whenever us-
release the control switch. While ing the cruise control system.
the control switch is pushed, the o During cruise-control driving
vehicle speed will gradually de- with a manual transaxle vehicle,
crease. do not shift into neutral without
depressing the clutch pedal, or
the engine will be overrevved. If
this happens, depress the clutch
pedal or release the main switch.
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL 87

B710A01E-GAT B710B01S-AAT
(If Installed) CENTER VENTILATOR
The center ventilators are located in
the middle of the dashboard. The di-
rection of air flow from the vents in the
center of the dashboard is adjustable.
To control the direction of the air flow,
move the knob in the center of the vent
up-and-down and side-to-side.

B710C02HP-AAT
SIDE VENTILATOR
The side ventilators are located on
each side of the dashboard. To change
the direction of the air flow, move the
knob in the center of the vent up-and-
down and side-to-side. The vents are
opened when the vent knob is moved
to " " position. The vents are closed
when the vent knob is moved to " ".
Keep these vents clear of any obstruc-
tions.

1. Side Defrost Nozzle

2. Side Ventilator
3. Windshield Defrost Nozzle B710A02E
4. Center Ventilator
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
88 HEATING AND VENTILATION

B670A01A-AAT B670D01E-AAT
Rotary type (If installed) Air Flow Control
1 2 3

HXDFL539
4
HXDOM046 B670D01E Face-Level
This model has four controls for the This is used to direct the flow of air. Air Selecting the "Face" mode will cause
heating and cooling system. They are: can be directed to the floor, dashboard air to be discharged through the face
outlets, or windshield. Five symbols level vents.
1. Air flow control are used to represent Face, Bi-Level,
2. Air intake control Floor, Floor-Defrost and Defrost air
3. Temperature control position.
4. Fan speed control
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
89

HXDFL540 HXDFL541 HXDFL543

Bi-Level Floor-Level Floor-Defrost Level

Air is discharged through the face vents Air is discharged through the floor Air is discharged through the wind-
and the floor vents. vents, windshield defroster nozzle, side shield defrost nozzle and the floor
defroster nozzle and side ventilator. vents, side defroster nozzle, side ven-
tilator.
If the "Floor-Defrost" mode is selected,
the A/C will turn on automatically and
"Fresh" mode will be activated.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
90

B670C02E-AAT With the "Fresh" mode selected, air

Air Intake Control enters the vehicle from the outside and
is heated or cooled according to the
function selected.
With the "Recirculation" mode selected,
air from within the passenger compart-
ment will be drawn through the heating
system and heated or cooled accord-
ing to the function selected.

HXDFL542
NOTE:
o It should be noted that prolonged
Defrost-Level B670C01E operation of the heating in "Re-
Air is discharged through the wind- This is used to select fresh outside air circulation" mode ( ) will give
shield defroster nozzle, side defroster or recirculating inside air. rise to fogging of the windshield
nozzle and side ventilator. To change the air intake control mode, and side windows and the air
If the "Defrost" mode is selected, the (Fresh mode, Recirculation mode) within the passenger compart-
A/C will turn on automatically and push the control button. ment will become stale. In addi-
"Fresh" mode will be activated to im- tion, prolonged use of the air
prove windshield defrosting. FRESH MODE ( ) : The indicator conditioning with the "Recircu-
light on the button goes off when the air lation" mode ( ) selected may
intake control is fresh mode. result in the air within the pas-
senger compartment becoming
RECIRCULATION MODE ( ): The excessively dry.
indicator light on the button is illumi- o When the ignition switch is
nated when the air intake control is turned "ON" the air intake con-
recirculation mode. trol will change to "Fresh" mode
( ) in floor, floor-defrost and
defrost position. This is normal
operation.
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
HEATING CONTROLS 91

B670E01A-AAT B670B02A-AAT B690A01E-AAT

Temperature Control Fan Speed Control
(Blower Control)

B690A01E
B670E01E
For normal heating operation, set the
B670A01E
This control is used to adjust the de- air intake control to the fresh air ( )
gree of heating or cooling desired. This is used to turn the blower fan on position and the air flow control to the
or off and to select the fan speed. floor ( ) position.
This blower fan speed, and therefore
the volume of air delivered from the For faster heating, the air intake con-
system, may be controlled manually trol should be set in the recirculate ( )
by setting the blower control between position.
the "1" and "4" positions.
"1" is lowest and "4" is the highest fan If the windows fog up, set the air flow
speed. control to the defrost ( ) position.
(The A/C will be on automatically and
"Fresh" mode will be activated.)

For maximum heat, rotate the tempera-

ture control to "Warm".
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
92 BI-LEVEL HEATING VENTILATION DEFROSTING/DEFOGGING

B700A02E-AAT B710A01S-AAT B720A04S-AAT

B700A01E B710A01E B720A01E

Your Hyundai is equipped with bi-level To operate the ventilation system: Use the heating/ventilation system to
heating controls. To use this feature: defrost or defog the windshield:
o Set the air intake control to "Fresh"
o Set the air intake control to the fresh mode ( ). To remove interior fog on the wind-
air ( ) position. o To direct all intake air to the dash- shield:
o Set the air flow control at the bi-level board vents, set the airflow control o Set the air flow control to the defrost
( ) position. to "Face" ( ). ( ) position. (The A/C will turn on
o Adjust the fan speed control to the o Adjust the fan speed control to the automatically and "Fresh" mode will
desired speed. desired speed. be activated.)
o Set the temperature control between o Set the temperature control between o Set the temperature control to the
"Cool" and "Warm". "Cool" and "Warm". desired position.
o Set the fan speed control between
"1" and "4" position.
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
93

NOTE: B730A01L-AAT

When the A/C is operated continu- Operation Tips

ously on the floor-defrost level ( ) o To keep dust or unpleasant fumes
or defrost level ( ), it may cause from entering the car through the
fog to form on the exterior wind- ventilation system, temporarily set
shield by the temperature differen- the air intake control to ( ).
tial. At this time set the air flow Be sure to return the control to ( )
control to the face level position ( ) when the irritation has passed to
and fan speed control to the low keep fresh air in the vehicle. This will
position. help keep the driver alert and com-
B740C01E fortable.
o Air for the heating/cooling system is
To remove frost or exterior fog drawn in through the grilles just
on the windshield: ahead of the windshield. Care should
be taken that these are not blocked
o Set the air flow control to the defrost
by leaves, snow, ice or other ob-
( ) position. (The A/C will turn on
structions.
automatically and "Fresh" mode will
o To prevent interior fog on the wind-
be activated.)
shield, set the air intake control to
o Set the temperature control to the
the fresh air ( ) position, fan speed
warm.
to the desired position, turn on the
o Set the fan speed control to position
air conditioning system, and adjust
"3" or "4".
temperature control to desired tem-
perature.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
94 AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

B740A01S-AAT B740B01S-AAT o Set the temperature control to

Air Conditioning Switch Air Conditioning Operation "Cool". ("Cool" provides maximum
(If installed) Cooling cooling. The temperature may be
moderated by moving the control
toward "Warm".)
o Adjust the fan control to the desired
speed. For greater cooling, turn the
fan control to one of the higher
speeds or temporarily select the
"Recirculation ( )" position on the
air intake control.

B740A02E B740B01E

The air conditioning is turned on or off To use the air conditioning to cool the
by pushing the A/C button on the heat- interior:
ing/air conditioning control panel.
o Set the side vent control to "OFF",
to shut off outside air entry.
o Turn on the fan control switch.
o Turn on the air conditioning switch
by pushing in on the switch. The air
conditioning indicator light should
come on at the same time.
o Set the air intake control to "Fresh"
mode ( ).
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
95

B740C01S-AAT B740D01A-AAT
Dehumidified Heating Operation Tips
For dehumidified heating: o If the interior of the car is hot when
you first get in, open the windows for
o Turn on the fan control switch. a few minutes to expel the hot air.
o Turn on the air conditioning switch. o When you are using the air condi-
The air conditioning indicator light tioning system, keep all windows
should come on at the same time. closed to keep hot air out.
o Set the air intake control to the o When moving slowly, as in heavy
"Fresh" mode ( ). traffic, shift to a lower gear. This
o Set the air flow control to the "Face" increases engine speed, which in
( ). turn increases the speed of the air
o Adjust the fan control to the desired conditioning compressor.
speed. o On steep grades, turn the air condi-
o For more rapid action, set the fan at tioning off to avoid the possibility of
one of the higher speeds. the engine over-heating.
o Adjust the temperature control to o During winter months or in periods
provide the desired amount of when the air conditioning is not used
warmth. regularly, run the air conditioning
once every month for a few min-
utes. This will help circulate the
lubricants and keep your system in
peak operating condition.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
96 AUTOMATIC HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL SYSTEM

B970A01Y-AAT TYPE A (Without A.Q.S: Air Quality System)

(If installed)
1 2 3
Your Hyundai is equipped with an auto-
matic heating and cooling control sys-
tem controlled by simply setting the
desired temperature.

B970B02E-GAT
Heating and Cooling Controls

1. Temperature Control Switch 4 5 6 7 89 10 11 HXDOM118

2. Display Window
3. Blower Fan Control Switch TYPE B (With A.Q.S: Air Quality System)
4. Air Flow Control Switch 1 2 3
5. AUTO (Automatic Control)Switch
6. Defroster Switch
7. OFF Switch
8. Air Conditioning Switch
9. Air lntake Control Switch/Air Quality
System Switch (If installed)
10.Rear Window Defroster Switch
11.Ambient Temperature Switch

HXDOM119
4 5 6 7 89 10 11
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
97

B970C02E-GAT
NOTE:
Automatic Operation If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, the temperature mode
will reset to Centigrade degrees.
This is a normal condition and you
can change the temperature mode
from Centigrade to Farenheit as fol-
lows;
Press the TEMP button down 3 sec-
onds or more with the button
OUTSIDE
TEMP

held down. The display shows that

HXD118A
the unit of temperature is adjusted to
HXD118D 2. Push the "TEMP" button to set the Centigrade or Fahrenheit.
desired temperature. (°C → °F or °F → °C)
The FATC (Full Automatic Tempera-
The temperature will increase to the
ture Control) system automatically con-
maximum 32°C(90°F) by pushing on Photo sensor
trols heating and cooling by doing as
the " " button. Each push of the
follows:
button will cause the temperature to
increase by 0.5°C(1°F).
1. Push the "AUTO" button. The indica-
The temperature will decrease to the
tor light will illuminate confirming that
minimum 17°C(62°F) by pushing on
the Face, Floor and/or Bi-Level
the " " button. Each push of the
modes as well as the blower speed
button will cause the temperature to
and air conditioner will be controlled
decrease by 0.5°C(1°F).
automatically.

HXDFL281S
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
98

NOTE: B995A01Y-GAT B980A01Y-AAT

Never place anything cover the sen- Ambient Temperature Switch MANUAL OPERATION
sor which is located on the instru- The heating and cooling system can be
ment panel to ensure better control controlled manually as well by pushing
of the heating and cooling system. buttons other than the "AUTO" button.
In this state, the system sequentially
works according to the order of buttons
selected.
The function of the buttons which are
not selected will be controlled automati-
cally.
Press the "AUTO" button in order to
HXD118I convert to automatic control of the sys-
tem.
Pressing the button displays
OUTSIDE
TEMP

the ambient temperature on the display

 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
99

B980B01Y-AAT B670C01E-AAT With the "Fresh" mode selected, air

Fan Speed Control Switch Air Intake Control Switch enters the vehicle from the outside and
(Without A.Q.S) is heated or cooled according to the
function selected.

With the "Recirculation" mode selected

air from within the passenger compart-
ment will be drawn through the heating
system and heated or cooled according
to the function selected.

NOTE:
HXD118C
o It should be noted that prolonged
operation of the heating system in
The fan speed can be set to the desired HXD118G
"Recirculation" mode ( ) will
speed by pressing the appropriate fan This is used to select fresh outside air give rise to fogging of the wind-
speed control button. The higher the fan or recirculation of inside air. shield and side windows and the
speed is, the more air is delivered. To change the air intake control mode, air within the passenger compart-
Pressing the "OFF" button turns off the (Fresh mode, Recirculation mode) push ment will become stale. In addi-
fan. the control button. tion, prolonged use of the air con-
ditioning with the "Recirculation"
FRESH MODE ( ) : The indicator mode ( ) selected may result
light on the button goes off when the air in the air within the passenger
intake control is fresh mode. compartment becoming exces-
sively dry.
RECIRCULATION MODE ( ) : The
indicator light on the button is illumi-
nated when the air intake control is
recirculation mode.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
100

o When the ignition switch is turned B980C02E-GAT

Exhaust Gas Cutoff Mode :
"ON" the air intake control will Air Intake Control Switch
change to "Fresh" mode ( ) (With A.Q.S) (If installed) Air enters the vehicle from the outside.
(regardless of the switch position). But if exhaust gas enters the vehicle
It is normal operation. The air from the outside, the exhaust gas cut-
intake control is operated in off mode ( ) is automatically
"AUTO" mode when turning the converted to the ( ) mode, to
ignition to the "ON" position if the prevent exhaust gas from entering the
"AUTO" mode was used before vehicle.
shutting off the engine.
NOTE:
o It should be noted that prolonged
operation of the heating system in
recirculation mode ( ) may
HXD118H result in misting of the windshield
This is used to select fresh outside air and side windows and the air within
or recirculate inside air automatically. the passenger compartment will
: OFF become stale. In addition, pro-
: ON longed use of the air conditioning
with the recirculation mode ( )
Fresh Mode : selected may result in the air within
the passenger compartment be-
Air enters the vehicle from the outside coming excessively dry.
and is heated or cooled according to the o When the ignition switch is turned
function selected. "ON" the air intake control will
change to ( ) mode except for
Recirculation Mode : turning "OFF" the ignition switch
Air from within the passenger compart- in A.Q.S mode ( ). It is normal
ment will be drawn through the heating operation. The air intake control is
system and heated or cooled according operated in "AUTO" mode when
to the function selected.
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
101

turning the ignition to the "ON" B980E01E-GAT

position if the "AUTO" mode was Air Flow Control

used before shutting off the en-
gine.

! CAUTION:
If the windows fog up with the Recir-
culation or A.Q.S mode selected, set
the air intake control to the Fresh air
HXDFL539
position or A.Q.S control to "OFF".
B980E01E
Face-Level
B980D01Y-AAT This is used to direct the flow of air. Air When selecting the "Face" mode, the
Heating and Cooling System Off can be directed to the floor, dashboard indicator light will come on, causing air
outlets, or windshield. Four symbols to be discharged through the face level
Press the "OFF" button to stop the are used to represent Face, Bi-Level, vents.
operation of the heating and cooling Floor and Floor-Defrost air position.
system.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
102

HXDFL540 HXDFL541 HXDFL543

Bi-Level Floor-Level Floor-Defrost Level

When selecting the "Bi-Level" mode, When selecting the "Floor-Level" mode, When selecting the "Floor-Defrost"
the indicator light will come on and the the indicator light will come on and the mode, the indicator light will come on
air will be discharged through the face air will be discharged through the floor and the air will be discharged through
vents and the floor vents. vents, windshield defrost nozzle, side the windshield defrost vents, the floor
defroster nozzle and side ventilator. vents and side defroster nozzle side
ventilator .
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
AIR CONDITIONER FILTER 103
(IN FRONT OF BLOWER UNIT)
B980F02E-GAT B760A04E-GAT
Defrost Switch
Outside air
Inside air ! CAUTION:
Filter
o Replace the filter every 15,000 km
(10,000 miles) or once a year. If the
car is being driven in severe con-
ditions such as dusty, rough
roads, more frequent air condi-
tioner filter inspections and
Inside air Blower fan changes are required.
Evaporator core o When the air flow rate is decreased,
Heater core B760A01E
it must be checked at an autho-
HXD118E
rized dealer.
The air conditioner filter is located in
When the "Defrost" button is pressed, front of the blower unit behind the glove
the ( ) mode will be automatically box.
selected and the air will be discharged It operates to decrease the amount of
through the windshield defrost nozzle, pollutants entering the car.
side defroster nozzle and side ventila- To replace the air conditioner filter, refer
tor. To assist in defrosting, the air to page 6-28.
conditioning will operate if ambient tem-
perature is higher than 3.5°C, and auto-
matically turns off if the ambient tem-
perature drops below 3.5°C.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
104 STEREO SOUND SYSTEM
B750A02A-AAT
AM reception FM radio station
How Car Audio Works Ionosphere Unobstructed
FM reception
Mountains area
Ionosphere

Buildings

Iron bridges
B750A02L Obstructed area B750A03L

B750A01L
AM broadcasts can be received at FM broadcasts are transmitted at high
greater distances than FM broadcasts. frequencies and do not bend to follow
AM and FM radio signals are broadcast This is because AM radio waves are the earth's surface. Because of this,
from transmitter towers located around transmitted at low frequencies. These FM broadcasts generally begin to fade
your city. They are intercepted by the long, low frequency radio waves can at short distances from the station.
radio antenna on your car. This signal is follow the curvature of the earth rather Also, FM signals are easily affected by
then received by the radio and sent to than travelling straight out into the buildings, mountains, or other obstruc-
your car speakers. atmosphere. In addition, they curve tions. These can result in certain listen-
When a strong radio signal has reached around obstructions so that they can ing conditions which might lead you to
your vehicle, the precise engineering provide better signal coverage. believe a problem exists with your ra-
of your audio system ensures the best dio. The following conditions are normal
possible quality reproduction. Howev- and do not indicate radio trouble:
er, in some cases the signal coming to
your vehicle may not be strong and
clear. This can be due to factors such
as the distance from the radio station,
closeness of other strong radio stations
or the presence of buildings, bridges or
other large obstructions in the area.
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
105

B750B02Y-AAT
Using a cellular phone or a two-
way radio
When a cellular phone is used inside
the vehicle, noise may be produced
from the audio equipment. This does
not mean that something is wrong with
the audio equipment. In such a case,
use the cellular phone at a place as far
as possible from the audio equipment.
B750A04L B750A05L

o Fading - As your car moves away o Station Swapping - As a FM signal ! CAUTION:

from the radio station, the signal will weakens, another more powerful When using a communication sys-
weaken and sound will begin to signal near the same frequency may tem such a cellular phone or a radio
fade. When this occurs, we suggest begin to play. This is because your set inside the vehicle, a separate
that you select another stronger sta- radio is designed to lock onto the external antenna must be fitted.
tion. clearest signal. If this occurs, select When a cellular phone or a radio set
o Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or another station with a stronger sig- is used with an internal antenna
large obstructions between the nal. alone, it may interfere with the
transmitter and your radio can dis- o Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio sig- vehicle's electrical system and ad-
turb the signal causing static or flut- nals being received from several versely affect safe operation of the
tering noises to occur. Reducing the directions can cause distortion or vehicle.
treble level may lessen this effect fluttering. This can be caused by a
until the disturbance clears. direct and reflected signal from the
same station, or by signals from two ! WARNING:
stations with close frequencies. If
Don't use a cellular phone when
this occurs, select another station
you are driving. Stop at a safe place
until the condition has passed.
to use a cellular phone.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
106 CAR AUDIO SYSTEMS
H210A01O-AAT
STEREO RADIO OPERATION (H210) (If installed)

2.FADER Control Knob

5. TUNE/SEEK Select Button
4.BAND Selector

6. PRESET Station Select Button

3. BASS/TREBLE Control Knob

1. POWER ON-OFF, BALANCE, VOLUME, SCAN Control Knob

H210A01O
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
107

H210B03O-AAT
SCAN Knob 4. BAND Selector
1. POWER ON-OFF/VOLUME FM

Control Knob When the scan knob is pressed, the Pressing the A M button changes the
frequency will increase and the receiv- AM, FM1 and FM2 bands. The mode
The radio unit may be operated when able stations will be tuned in one after selected is displayed on LCD.
the ignition key is in the "ACC" or "ON" another, receiving each station for 5
position. Rotate the knob clockwise to seconds. To stop scanning, press the 5. TUNE (Manual) Select Button
switch the radio unit on and to increase scan knob again.
the volume. Press the ( ) side or ( ) side to increase
The LCD shows the radio frequency in or to decrease the frequency. With the
2. FAD (Fader Control) Knob
the radio mode. Turn the knob counter- button held down for 1 sec. or more, the
clockwise to reduce the volume and to Turn the control knob counterclockwise stop signal (broadcasting radio wave) is
switch the radio unit off. to emphasize front speaker sound (rear ignored and channel selection contin-
speaker sound will be attenuated). When ues.
BAL (Balance Control) Knob the control knob is turned clockwise,
rear speaker sound will be emphasized SEEK Operation
Pull and turn the control knob clockwise (front speaker sound will be attenu- (Automatic Channel Selection)
to emphasize right speaker sound (left ated).
speaker sound will be attenuated). When Press the TUNE select button for 1 sec.
the control knob is turned counterclock- 3. BASS Control Knob or more. When the ( ) side is pressed,
wise, left speaker sound will be empha- the unit will automatically tune to the
sized (right speaker soundwill be at- Press to pop the knob out and turn to next higher frequency and when the ( )
tenuated). the left or right for the desired bass side is pressed, it will automatically
After adjusting the balance, push the tone. tune to the next lower frequency.
knob again to use the other function.
TREBLE Control Knob.
Further pull-lock position of popped-up
knob. Turn to the left or right for the
desired treble tone.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
108

6. PRESET STATION SELECT A total of 18 stations can be pro-

Button grammed by selecting one AM and
two FM stations per button.
Six (6) stations for AM, FM1 and FM2 o When completed, any preset station
respectively can be preset in the elec- may be recalled by selecting AM,
tronic memory circuit on this unit. FM1 or FM2 band and the appropri-
ate station button.
HOW TO PRESET STATIONS
Six AM and twelve FM stations may be
programmed into the memory of the ! CAUTION:
radio. Then, by simply pressing the o Do not place beverages close to
band select button and/or one of the six the audio system. The playback
station select buttons, you may recall mechanism may be damaged if
any of these stations instantly. To pro- you spill them.
gram the stations, follow these steps: o Do not impact or strike the audio
system, or the playback mecha-
o Press band selector to set the band nism could be damaged.
for AM, FM1, and FM2.
o Select the desired station to be stored
by seek, scan or manual tuning.
o Determine the preset station select
button you wish to use to access that
station.
o Press the station select button for
more than two seconds. A select
button indicator will show in the dis-
play indicating which select button
you have depressed. You should
then release the button, and proceed
to program the next desired station.
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
109

H240A01O-GAT
STEREO RADIO OPERATION (H240) (If installed)

5. BAND Selector
3. TREBLE/FADER Control Knob
(TREB/FAD)

2. BASS/BALANCE Control Knob

7. SCAN Button (BASS/BAL)
6. PRESET Buttons
4. TUNE/SEEK Select Button

1. POWER ON/OFF, VOLUME Control Knob

H240A01O
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
110

H240B03O-GAT When the control knob is turned coun- SEEK Operation

1. POWER ON-OFF Control terclockwise, left speaker sound will be (Automatic Channel Selection)
Knob emphasized (right speaker sound will
be attenuated). Press the TUNE select button 0.5 sec
The radio unit may be operated when or more. Releasing it will automatically
the ignition key is in the "ACC" or "ON" tune to the next available station with a
position. Press the knob to switch the 3. TREB (Treble Control) Knob
beep sound.
power on. The LCD shows the radio Press to pop the knob out and turn to When the ( ) side is pressed longer than
frequency in the radio mode or the tape the left or right for the desired treble 0.5 second, releasing will automatically
direction indicator in the tape mode. To tone. tune to the next higher frequency and
switch the power off, press the knob when the ( ) side is pressed longer than
again. FAD (Fader Control) Knob 0.5 second and releasing will automati-
cally tune to the next lower frequency.
VOLUME Control Pull the treble control knob further out.
Turn the control knob counterclockwise
Rotate the knob clockwise to increase to emphasize front speaker sound (rear 5. BAND Selector
the volume and turn the knob counter- speaker sound will be attenuated). Pressing the FM/AM button changes the
clockwise to reduce the volume. When the control knob is turned clock- AM, FM1 and FM2 bands. The mode
wise, rear speaker sound will be em- selected is displayed on LCD.
2. BASS Control Knob phasized (front speaker sound will be
Press to pop the knob out and turn to attenuated). 6. PRESET STATION SELECT
the left or right for the desired bass Button
tone. 4. TUNE (Manual) Select Button
Six (6) stations for AM, FM1 and FM2
Press the ( ) side or ( ) side to increase respectively can be preset in the elec-
BAL (Balance Control) Knob or to decrease the frequency. Press tronic memory circuit on this unit.
Pull the bass control knob further out. either button and hold down to continu-
Turn the control knob clockwise to ously scroll. Release button once the
emphasize right speaker sound (left desired station is reached.
speaker sound will be attenuated).
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
111

HOW TO PRESET STATIONS o When completed, any preset station

may be recalled by selecting AM,
Six AM and twelve FM stations may be FM1 or FM2 band and the appropri-
programmed into the memory of the ate station button.
radio. Then, by simply pressing the
band select button and/or one of the six
7. SCAN Button
station select buttons, you may recall
any of these stations instantly. To pro- When the scan button is pressed, the
gram the stations, follow these steps: frequency will be increased and the
receivable stations will be tuned in one
o Press band selector to set the band after another, receiving each station for
for AM, FM1, or FM2. 5 seconds. To stop scanning, press the
o Select the desired station to be stored scan button again.
by seek or manual tuning.
o Determine the preset station select
button you wish to use to access that ! CAUTION:
station.
o Press the station select button for o Do not place beverages close to
more than two seconds. A select the audio system. The playback
button indicator will show in the dis- mechanism may be damaged if
play indicating which select button you spill them.
you have depressed. The frequency o Do not impact or strike the audio
display will flash after it has been system, or the playback mecha-
stored into the memory with beep nism could be damaged.
sound. You should then release the
button, and proceed to program the
next desired station. A total of 18
stations can be programmed by se-
lecting one AM and two FM stations
per button.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
112

H240C01O-GAT
CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER OPERATION (H240) (If installed)

3. TAPE PROGRAM Button

6. TAPE SLOT
2. AUTO MUSIC SELECT Button
4. EJECT Button

1. FF/REW Button

5. DOLBY SELECT Button

H240A01O
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
113

H240A03O-GAT
3. TAPE PROGRAM Button
1. FF/REW Button
This allows you to play the reverse side ! CAUTION:
o The FF (fast forward tape winding) of the tape by merely depressing the
starts when the button is pressed o Do not insert anything like coins
program button. into the player slot as damage to
during the PLAY or REW. An arrow will appear in the display to
o The play starts when the button the unit may occur.
show tape direction. o Do not place beverages close to
is pressed again during the FF.
o The REW (rewinding) starts when the audio system. The playback
NOTE: mechanism may be damaged if
the button is pressed during the
When tape operation is abnormal or you spill them.
PLAY or FF.
ER8 fault code is displayed, press o Do not impact or strike the audio
o The play starts when the button
the eject button more than 5 seconds system, or the playback mecha-
is pressed again during the REW.
to reset the deck function. nism could be damaged.
2. AUTO MUSIC SELECT Button 4. EJECT Button
Press the button to find the starting
o When the EJECT button is pressed
point of each song in a prerecorded
with the cassette loaded, the cas-
music tape.
sette is ejected.
The quiet space between songs (must
o When the EJECT button is pressed
have at least a 4 sec. gap) can be
during the FF/REW, the cassette is
identified by the AUTO MUSIC SE-
ejected.
LECT button.

o Pressing the button will play the 5. DOLBY SELECT Button

beginning of the next music seg- If you get background noise during
ment. PLAY, you can reduce this consider-
o Pressing the button will start ably by merely pressing DOLBY SE-
replay at the beginning of the music LECT button.
just listened to. If you want to release, press the button
again.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
114

H260A01O-AAT
STEREO RADIO OPERATION (H260) (If installed)

3. BASS/TREBLE Control Knob

4. SCAN Button

6. BAND Selector

7. PRESET Button

5. TUNE/SEEK Select Button

1. POWER ON-OFF/VOLUME/BALANCE Control Knob

H260A01O
2. FADER Control Knob
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
115

H260B03E-AAT
2. FAD (Fader Control) Knob 5. TUNE (Manual) Select Button
1. POWER ON-OFF Control
Knob Turn the control knob counterclockwise Press the ( ) side or ( ) side to increase
to emphasize front speaker sound (rear or to decrease the frequency. Press
The radio unit may be operated when speaker sound will be attenuated). When either button and hold down to continu-
the ignition key is in the "ACC" or "ON" the control knob is turned clockwise, ously scroll. Release button once the
position. Press the knob to switch the rear speaker sound will be emphasized desired station is reached.
power on. The LCD shows the radio (front speaker sound will be attenu-
frequency in the radio mode or the CD ated). SEEK Operation
track indicator in either the CD mode or (Automatic Channel Selection)
CD AUTO CHANGER mode. To switch 3. BASS Control Knob
the power off, press the knob again. Press the TUNE select button for 0.5
Press to pop the knob out and turn to sec or more. Releasing it will automati-
VOLUME Control the left or right for the desired bass cally tune to the next available station
tone. with a beep sound.
Rotate the knob clockwise to increase When the ( ) side is pressed longer
the volume and turn the knob counter- TREB (Treble Control) Knob than 0.5 second and releasing will auto-
clockwise to reduce the volume. matically tune to the next higher fre-
Pull the bass control knob further out.
quency and when the ( ) side is pressed
BALANCE Control Turn to the left or right for the desired
treble tone. longer than 0.5 second, releasing will
Pull and turn the control knob clockwise automatically tune the next lower fre-
to emphasize right speaker sound (left quency.
4. SCAN Button
speaker sound will be attenuated). When
the control knob is turned counterclock- When the scan button is pressed, the 6. BAND Selector
wise, left speaker sound will be empha- frequency will increase and the receiv-
Pressing the FM/AM button changes the
sized (right speaker sound will be at- able stations will be tuned in one after
another, receiving each station for 5 AM, FM1 and FM2 bands. The mode
tenuated). selected is displayed on LCD.
seconds. To stop scanning, press the
scan button again.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
116

7. PRESET STATION Select You should then release the button,

Button and proceed to program the next
desired station. A total of 18 stations
Six (6) stations for AM, FM1 or FM2 can be programmed by selecting one
respectively can be preset in the elec- AM and two FM stations per button.
tronic memory circuit on this unit. o When completed, any preset station
may be recalled by selecting AM,
HOW TO PRESET STATIONS FM1 or FM2 band and the appropri-
Six AM and twelve FM stations may be ate station button.
programmed into the memory of the
radio. Then, by simply pressing the
band select button and/or one of the six ! CAUTION:
station select buttons, you may recall o Do not place beverages close to
any of these stations instantly. To pro- the audio system. The playback
gram the stations, follow these steps: mechanism may be damaged if
you spill them.
o Press band selector to set the band o Do not impact or strike the audio
for AM, FM1 or FM2. system, or the playback mecha-
o Select the desired station to be stored nism could be damaged.
by seek, scan or manual tuning.
o Determine the preset station select
button you wish to use to access that
station.
o Press the station select button for
more than two seconds. A select
button indicator will show in the dis-
play indicating which select button
you have depressed. The frequency
display will flash after it has been
stored into the memory.
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
117

H260B01O-AAT
COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION (H260) (If installed)

4.SCAN Button

1.Playing CD
3. TRACK UP/DOWN
6. EJECT Button

2.FF/REW Button
5. REPEAT Button

H260A01O
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
118

B260D03O-AAT
3. TRACK UP/DOWN 6. EJECT Button
1. Playing CD
o The desired track on the disc cur- When the EJECT button is pressed
o Insert the CD with the label facing rently being played can be selected with a CD loaded, the CD will eject.
upward. using the track number.
o Insert the CD to start CD playback, o Press once to skip forward to NOTE:
during radio operation. the beginning of the next track. o If the CD does not operate prop-
o When a disc is in the CD deck, if you Press once to skip back to the erly or if the ER2 fault code is
press the CD button, the CD player beginning of the track. displayed, use one of two meth-
will begin playing even if the radio is
ods to reset the CD deck function.
being used. 4. SCAN Button - Remove the audio fuse for 5
o The CD player can be used when the
o Press the SCAN button to playback minutes. Then, reinstall the au-
ignition switch is in either the "ON" or
dio fuse.
"ACC" position. the first 10 seconds of each track.
- Disconnect the negative termi-
o Press the SCAN button again within
10 sec. When you have reached the nal of the battery and wait 5
2. FF/REW ( / ) minutes.
desired track.
If you want to fast forward or reverse Then reconnect the negative bat-
through the compact disc track, push tery terminal.
5. REPEAT Button o To assure proper operation of the
and hold in the FF ( ) or REW ( )
button. o To repeat the track you are currently unit, keep the vehicle interior tem-
When you release the button, the com- listening to, press the RPT button. perature within a normal range by
pact disc player will resume playing. To cancel , press again. using the vehicle's air condition-
o If you do not release RPT operation ing or heating system.
when the track ends, it will automati- o When replacing the fuse, replace
cally be replayed. it with a fuse having the correct
This process will be continued until capacity.
you push the button again.
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
119

o The preset station frequencies are o Avoid using CD-Recordable or CD-

all erased when the car battery is
disconnected. Therefore, all data
! CAUTION: Rewritable as the player could not
be operated in recording way of
will have to be set again if this o Do not insert warped or poor qual-
the CD maker. When using the
should occur. ity discs into the CD player as
compact disc player, profession-
o Do not add any oil to the rotating damage to the unit may occur.
ally recorded CDs are recom-
parts. Keep magnets, screwdriv- o Do not insert anything like coins
mended.
ers and other metallic objects away into the player slot as damage to
from the tape mechanism and head. the unit may occur.
o This equipment is designed to be o Do not place beverages close to
used only in a 12 volt DC battery the audio system. The playback
system with negative ground. mechanism may be damaged if
o This unit is made of precision you spill them.
parts. Do not attempt to disas- o Do not impact or strike the audio
semble or adjust any parts. system, or the playback mecha-
o When driving your vehicle, be sure nism could be damaged.
to keep the volume of the unit set o Driving on the off-roads or other
low enough to allow you to hear vibrations may skip your compact
sounds coming from the outside. disc.
o Do not expose this equipment (in- Do not use the audio system on
cluding the speakers) to water or off-roads as the discs could be
excessive moisture. scratched and damaged.
o Do not grip or pull out the disc
with your hand while the disc is
being pulled into the unit by the
self loading mechanism. These
can cause poor disc scratching to
occur or damage the compact disc
player.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
120

B260E01E-AAT
CD AUTO CHANGER (H260) (If installed)

6. SCAN Button
1. CD Select Button

3. TRACK UP/DOWN

4. FF/REW Button
5. REPEAT Button
2. DISC Select Button
H260A01O
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
121

B260F03E-AAT
2. DISC Select Button This process will be continued until
The CD auto changer is located in the you push the button again.
TUNE
left side of the trunk. To select the CD you want, push DISC to
change the disc number.
6. SCAN Button
o To use the CD auto changer.
3. TRACK UP/DOWN o Press the SCAN button to playback
1. Open the sliding lid of the CD auto the first 10 seconds of each track.
o The desired track on the disc cur- o Press the SCAN button again within
changer.
rently being played can be selected 10 sec. When you have reached the
2. To eject the compact disc maga-
using the track number. desired track.
zine, press the EJECT button lo-
o Press once to skip forward to
cated inside the CD auto changer.
the beginning of the next track.
3. Insert the discs into the magazine.
Press once to skip back to the
NOTE:
4. Push the magazine into the CD auto o When replacing the fuse, replace
beginning of the track.
changer and close the sliding lid. it with a fuse having the correct
capacity.
o The CD auto changer can be used 4. FF/REW ( / ) o This equipment is designed to be
when the ignition switch is in either If you want to fast forward or reverse used only in a 12 volt DC battery
the "ON" or "ACC" position. through the compact disc track, push system with negative ground.
and hold in the FF ( ) or REW ( ) o This unit is made of precision
1. CD Select Button button. parts. Do not attempt to disas-
When you release the button, the com- semble or adjust any parts.
When the CD changer magazine con-
pact disc player will resume playing. o When driving your vehicle, be sure
tains discs, press the CD button and
to keep the volume of the unit set
the CD changer can be used even if the
5. REPEAT low enough to allow you to hear
radio is being used. The Hyundai CD
sounds coming from the outside.
changer can hold up to eight discs. The o To repeat the track you are currently
disc number will be lit, and the track listening to, press the RPT button.
number, and elapsed time will be dis- To cancel , press again.
played. o If you do not release RPT operation
when the track ends, it will automati-
cally be replayed.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
122

o Avoid using CD-Recordable or CD-

! CAUTION: Rewritable as the changer could
o Do not insert warped or poor qual- not be operated in recording way
ity discs into the CD changer as of the CD maker. When using the
damage to the unit may occur. compact disc changer, profes-
o Do not insert anything like coins sionally recorded CDs are recom-
into the changer slot as damage to mended.
the unit may occur.
o Do not place beverages close to
the audio system. The playback
mechanism may be damaged if
you spill them. ! WARNING:
o Do not impact or strike the audio
system, or the playback mecha- Never attempt to change CDs the
nism could be damaged. already inserted in the CD changer
o Driving on the off-roads or other magazine while the vehicle is mov-
vibrations may skip your compact ing. This could result in loss of con-
disc. trol or an accident that may cause
Do not use the audio system on death, serious insury, or property
off-roads as the discs could be damage.
scratched and damaged.
o Do not grip or pull out the disc
with your hand while the disc is
being pulled into the unit by the
self loading mechanism. These
can cause poor disc scratching to
occur or damage the compact disc
changer.
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
123

H290A01E-GAT
STEREO RADIO OPERATION (H280)/(H290) (If installed)
8. BEST STATION MEMORY
1. POWER ON/OFF VOLUME Control Knob
or SCAN Button (If installed)
7. EQUALIZER Button

5. PRESET Buttons 3. TREBLE/FAD Konb

4. TUNE/SEEK Select Button 2. BASS/BALANCE Control Knob
6. BAND Select Button
H290A01O
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
124

H290B03E-GAT
BALANCE Control knob 4. TUNE (Manual) Select Button
1. POWER ON-OFF Control
Knob Pull the Bass control knob out further. Press the ( ) side or ( ) side to increase
Rotate the knob clockwise to empha- or to decrease the frequency. Press
The radio unit may be operated when size right speaker sound (left speaker either button and hold down to continu-
the ignition key is in the "ACC" or "ON" sound will be attenuated). When the ously scroll. Release button once the
position. Press the button to switch the control knob is turned counterclock- desired station is reached.
power on. The display shows the radio wise, left speaker sound will be empha-
frequency in the radio mode, the tape sized (right speaker sound will be at- SEEK Operation
direction indicator in the tape mode or tenuated). (Automatic Channel Selection)
CD track in either the CD mode or CD
AUTO CHANGER mode. To switch the 3. TREBLE/FAD Knob Press the TUNE select button for 0.5
power off, press the button again. sec or more. Releasing it will automati-
TREBLE Control Knob
cally tune to the next available station
VOLUME Control Press to pop the knob out and turn to with a beep sound.
the left or right for the desired treble When the ( ) side is pressed longer
Rotate the knob clockwise to increase tone. than 0.5 second and releasing will auto-
the volume and turn the knob counter- matically tune to the next higher fre-
clockwise to reduce the volume. FAD (Fader Control) Knob quency and when the ( ) side is
pressed longer than 0.5 second, releas-
2. BASS/BALANCE Control Pull the Treble control knob out further. ing will automatically tune to the next
Knob Turn the control knob counterclockwise lower frequency.
BASS Control Knob to emphasize front speaker sound (rear
speaker sound will be attenuated). When
Press to pop the knob out. To increase the control knob is turned clockwise,
5. PRESET STATION Select But-
the bass, rotate the knob clockwise, rear speaker sound will be emphasized tons
while to decrease the bass, rotate the (front speaker sound will be attenu- Six (6) stations for AM, FM1 and FM2
knob counterclockwise. ated). respectively can be preset in the elec-
tronic memory circuit.
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
125

HOW TO PRESET STATIONS o When completed, any preset station 8. Best Station Memory Button
may be recalled by selecting AM, (BSM) (If installed)
Six AM and twelve FM stations may be FM1 or FM2 band and the appropri-
programmed into the memory of the ate station button. When the BSM button is pressed for
radio. Then, by simply pressing the two seconds or longer, the six channels
band select button and/or one of the six from the highest field intensity are se-
6. BAND Selector
station select buttons, you may recall lected next and stored in memory. The
any of these stations instantly. To pro- Pressing the FM/AM button changes the stations selected are stored in the se-
gram the stations, follow these steps: AM, FM1 and FM2 bands. The mode quence frequency from the first preset
selected is shown on the display. key.
o Press band selector to set the band
for AM, FM1 or FM2. 7. EQUALIZER Button SCAN Button (If installed)
o Select the desired station to be stored
by seek or manual tuning. Press the EQ button to select the When the scan button is pressed, the
o Determine the preset station select CLASSIC, JAZZ, ROCK and DEFEAT frequency will increase and the receiv-
button you wish to use to access that MODE for the desired tone quality. able stations will be tuned in one after
station. Each press of the button changes the another, receiving each station for 5
o Press the station select button for display as follows; seconds. To stop scanning, press the
more than two seconds. A select scan button again.
CLASSIC → JAZZ → ROCK → DEFEAT
button indicator will show in the dis-
play indicating which select button
you have depressed. The frequency ! CAUTION:
display will flash after it has been o Do not place beverages close to
stored into the memory with beep the audio system. The playback
sound. You should then release the mechanism may be damaged if
button, and proceed to program the you spill them.
next desired station. A total of 18 o Do not impact or strike the audio
stations can be programmed by se- system, or the playback mecha-
lecting one AM and two FM station nism could be damaged.
per button.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
126

H290C01E-GAT
CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER OPERATION (H280)/(H290) (If installed)

4.TAPE EJECT Button

5.EQUALIZER
Button

2.AUTO MUSIC
Select Button

1.FF/REW Button
6.DOLBY Button
3.TAPE PROGRAM Button
H290A01O
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
127

H290D02O-GAT
3. TAPE PROGRAM Button 6. DOLBY Button
1. FF/REW Button
This allows you to play the reverse side If you get background noise during tape
o Fast forward tape winding starts of the tape by merely depressing the PLAY, you can reduce this consider-
when the FF ( ) button is pressed program button. An arrow will appear in ably by merely pressing the DOLBY
during the PLAY or REW mode. the display to show tape direction. button. If you want to cancel the DOLBY
o Tape play starts when the FF ( ) feature, press the button again.
button is pressed again during the FF 4. TAPE EJECT button
mode.
o Tape rewinding starts when the REW
( ) button is pressed during the
o When the button is pressed with
the cassette loaded, the cassette is
! CAUTION:
PLAY or FF mode. ejected. o Do not insert anything like coins
o Tape play starts when the REW ( ) o When the button is pressed into the player slot as damage to
button pressed again during the REW during the FF/REW mode, the cas- the unit may occur.
mode. sette is ejected. o Do not place beverages close to
the audio system. The playback
2. AUTO MUSIC Select Button 5. EQ Button mechanism may be damaged if
you spill them.
Press the button to find the starting Press the EQ button to select the o Do not impact or strike the audio
point of each song in a prerecorded CLASSIC, JAZZ, ROCK and DEFEAT system, or the playback mecha-
music tape. The quiet space between MODE for the desired tone quality. nism could be damaged.
songs (must have at least a 4 sec. gap) Each press of the button changes the
can be identified by the AUTO MUSIC display as follows;
Select button.
CLASSIC → JAZZ → ROCK → DEFEAT
o Pressing the button will play the
beginning of the next music seg-
ment.
o Pressing the button will start
replay at the beginning of the music
just listened to.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
128

H290E01E-GAT
COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION (H280)/(H290) (If installed)

6.CD EJECT Button

7.SCAN Button
(If installed)
5.EQUALIZER Button

3.TRACK UP/DOWN

2.FF/REW Button
4.REPEAT

1.CD Select Button

H290A01O
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
129

H290F02O-GAT
3. TRACK UP/DOWN 6. CD EJECT Button
1. CD Select Button
o The desired track on the disc cur- When the button is pressed with
o Insert the CD with the label facing rently being played can be selected a CD loaded, the CD will eject.
upward. using the track number.
o Insert the CD to start CD playback, o Press button once to skip for- 7. SCAN Button (If installed)
during radio operation or cassette ward to the beginning of the next
tape playing. track. Press button once to skip o Press the SCAN button to playback
o When a disc is in the CD deck, if you back to the beginning of the track. the first 10 seconds of each track.
press the CD button the CD player o Press the SCAN button again within
will begin playing even if the radio or 10 sec. for the desired track.
4. REPEAT
cassette player is being used.
o The CD player can be used when the o To repeat the track you are currently NOTE:
ignition switch is in either the "ON" or listening to, press the RPT button. o To assure proper operation of the
"ACC" position. To cancel , press again. unit, keep the vehicle interior tem-
o If you do not release RPT operation perature within a normal range by
2. FF/REW ( / ) when the track ends, it will automati- using the vehicle's air condition-
cally be replayed. ing or heating system.
If you want to fast forward or reverse This process will be continued until o When replacing the fuse, replace
through the compact disc track, push you push the button again. it with a fuse having the correct
and hold in the FF ( ) or REW ( )
capacity.
button. 5. EQUALIZER Button o The preset station frequencies are
When you release the button, the com-
all erased when the car battery is
pact disc player will resume playing. Press the EQ button to select the
CLASSIC, JAZZ, ROCK and DEFEAT disconnected. Therefore, all data
will have to be set again if this
MODE for the desired tone quality.
should occur.
Each press of the button changes the
display as follows; o Do not add any oil to the rotating
parts. Keep magnets, screwdriv-
CLASSIC → JAZZ → ROCK → DEFEAT ers and other metallic objects away
from the tape mechanism and head.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
130

o This equipment is designed to be o Avoid using CD-Recordable or CD-

used only in a 12 volt DC battery
system with negative ground.
! CAUTION: Rewritable as the player could not
be operated in recording way of
o This unit is made of precision o Do not insert warped or poor qual-
the CD maker. When using the
parts. Do not attempt to disas- ity discs into the CD player as
compact disc player, profession-
semble or adjust any parts. damage to the unit may occur.
ally recorded CDs are recom-
o When driving your vehicle, be sure o Do not insert anything like coins
mended.
to keep the volume of the unit set into the player slot as damage to
low enough to allow you to hear the unit may occur.
sounds coming from the outside. o Do not place beverages close to
o Do not expose this equipment (in- the audio system. The playback
cluding the speakers and tape) to mechanism may be damaged if
water or excessive moisture. you spill them.
o Do not impact or strike the audio
system, or the playback mecha-
nism could be damaged.
o Driving on the off-roads or other
vibrations may skip your compact
disc.
Do not use the audio system on
off-roads as the discs could be
scratched and damaged.
o Do not grip or pull out the disc
with your hand while the disc is
being pulled into the unit by the
self loading mechanism. These
can cause poor disc scratching to
occur or damage the compact disc
player.
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
131

H290G01E-GAT
CD AUTO CHANGER (H280)/(H290) (If installed)

6. SCAN Button
(If installed)
7. EQ Button

3. TRACK UP/DOWN

4. FF/REW Button
5. REPEAT
2.DISC Select Button
1. CD CHANGER Select Button
H290A01O
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
132

B290H03E-GAT
2. DISC Select Button 5. REPEAT
The CD auto changer is located in the
left side of the trunk. To select the CD you want, push TUNE
DISC to o To repeat the track you are currently
change the disc number. listening to, press the RPT button.
o To use the CD auto changer. To cancel , press again.
o If you do not release RPT operation
1. Open the sliding lid of the CD auto 3. TRACK UP/DOWN when the track ends, it will automati-
changer. cally be replayed.
o The desired track on the disc cur- This process will be continued until
2. To eject the compact disc maga-
rently being played can be selected you push the button again.
zine, press the EJECT button lo-
using the track number.
cated inside the CD auto changer.
o Press once to skip forward to
3. Insert the discs into the magazine.
the beginning of the next track.
6. SCAN Button (If installed)
4. Push the magazine into the CD auto
Press once to skip back to the o Press the SCAN button to playback
changer and close the sliding lid.
beginning of the track. the first 10 seconds of each track.
o Press the SCAN button again within
o The CD auto changer can be used
4. FF/REW ( / ) 10 sec. When you have reached the
when the ignition switch is in either
desired track.
"ON" or "ACC" position. If you want to fast forward or reverse
through the compact disc track, push
1. CD CHANGER Select Button 7. EQ Button
and hold in the FF ( ) or REW ( )
button. Press the EQ button to select the
When the CD changer magazine con-
When you release the button, the com- CLASSIC, JAZZ, ROCK and DEFEAT
tains discs, press the CD/CDC button
pact disc player will resume playing. MODE for the desired tone quality.
and the CD changer can be used even
Each press of the button changes the
if the radio or cassette player is being
display as follows;
used. The Hyundai CD changer can
hold up to eight discs. The disc number
CLASSIC → JAZZ → ROCK → DEFEAT
will be lit, and the track number, and
elapsed time will be displayed.
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
133

NOTE: o Avoid using CD-Recordable or CD-

o When replacing the fuse, replace
it with a fuse having the correct
! CAUTION: Rewritable as the changer could
o Do not insert warped or poor qual- not be operated in recording way
capacity. of the CD maker. When using the
o This equipment is designed to be ity discs into the CD changer as
damage to the unit may occur. compact disc changer, profes-
used only in a 12 volt DC battery sionally recorded CDs are recom-
system with negative ground. o Do not insert anything like coins
into the changer slot as damage to mended.
o This unit is made of precision
parts. Do not attempt to disas- the unit may occur.
semble or adjust any parts. o Do not place beverages close to
o When driving your vehicle, be sure the audio system. The playback
to keep the volume of the unit set mechanism may be damaged if ! WARNING:
low enough to allow you to hear you spill them.
o Do not impact or strike the audio Never attempt to change CDs the
sounds coming from the outside.
system, or the playback mecha- already inserted in the CD changer
nism could be damaged. magazine while the vehicle is mov-
o Driving on the off-roads or other ing. This could result in loss of con-
vibrations may skip your compact trol or an accident that may cause
disc. death, serious insury, or property
Do not use the audio system on damage.
off-roads as the discs could be
scratched and damaged.
o Do not grip or pull out the disc
with your hand while the disc is
being pulled into the unit by the
self loading mechanism. These
can cause poor disc scratching to
occur or damage the compact disc
changer.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
134 AUDIO FAULT CODE

B890A01Y-AAT

If you see any error indication in the display while using the system in the CD or Tape mode, find the cause in the chart below.
If you cannot clear the error indication, take the car to your Hyundai dealer.

INDICATION CAUSE SOLUTION

CD DECK MECHANICAL ERROR After resetting the audio system, push the eject button.
Er2
(EJECT ERROR, LOADING ERROR) If disc is not ejected, consult your Hyundai dealer.
Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.
FOCUS ERROR
Er3 Press the eject button and pull out the disc.
DATA READ ERROR
Then insert a normal CD disc.
Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the CD player.
Er6 DISC ERROR
Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.
TAPE DECK ERROR After resetting the audio system, push the eject button.
Er8
TAPE EJECT ERROR If tape does not eject, consult your Hyundai dealer.
Fault code will reset automatically when the temperature returns
HHH TEMPERATURE IS TOO HIGH
to normal.
NO DISC IN MAGAZINE
no CD NO CD MAGAZINE IN THE AUTO Insert disc in magazine or insert CD magazine in the auto changer.
CHANGER
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
CARE OF DISC 135

B850A01F-AAT
Damaged Disc Keep Your Discs Clean
Proper Handling
Do not attempt to play damaged, warped
or cracked discs. These could severely
damage the playback mechanism.

Storage
When not in use, place your discs in
their individual cases and store them in
a cool place away from the sun, heat,
and dust.
Do not grip or pull out the disc with your
B850A01L hand while the disc is being pulled into B850A02L
the unit by the self loading mechanism. Fingerprints, dust, or soil on the surface
Handle your disc as shown. Do not drop Do not pull the unit from the dash
the disc. Hold the disc so you will not of a disc could cause the pickup to skip
immediately after a disc is inserted or signal tracks. Wipe the surface clean
leave fingerprints on the surface. If the
the eject switch has been pressed. If with a clean soft cloth.
surface is scratched, it may cause the the unit is pulled out before an operation
pickup to skip signal tracks. Do not If the surface is heavily soiled, dampen
is completed, the disc will be unstable a clean soft cloth in a solution of mild
affix tape, paper, or gummed labels on
in the unit and may be damaged. neutral detergent to wipe it clean.
the disc. Do not write on the disc. Do not attempt to insert a disc into the
unit when the unit is out of the dash or
the power is off.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
136 CARE OF CASSETTE TAPES

B860A01A-AAT o Never leave a cassette inserted in o Be sure that the cassette label is not
the player when not being played. loose or peeling off or tape ejection
This could damage the tape player may be difficult.
unit and the cassette tape. o Never touch or soil the actual audio
o We strongly recommend against the tape surfaces.
use of tapes longer than C-60 (60 o Keep all magnetized objects, such
minutes total). Tapes such as C-120 as electric motors, speakers or trans-
or C-180 are very thin and do not formers away from your cassette
perform as well in the automotive tapes and tape player unit.
environment. o Store cassettes in a cool, dry place
with the open side facing down to
prevent dust from setting in the cas-
B860A01L
sette body.
Proper care of your cassette tapes will o Avoid repeated fast reverse usage to
extend the tape life and increase your replay one given tune or tape sec-
listening enjoyment. Always protect tion. This can cause poor tape wind-
your tapes and cassette cases from ing to occur, and eventually cause
direct sunlight, severely cold and dusty excessive internal drag and poor
conditions. When not in use, cassettes audio quality in the cassette. If this
should always be stored in the original occurs, it can sometimes be cor-
protective cassette case. When the rected by fast winding the tape from
vehicle is very hot or cold, allow the B880A03E end to end several times. If this does
interior temperature to become more not correct the problem, do not con-
comfortable before listening to your tinue to use the tape in your vehicle.
cassettes.
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
ANTENNA 137

B870A02A-GAT
Fixed Rod Antenna (If installed)

Head

Cotton applicator
B860A02L B860A03L

o The playback head, capstan and NOTE: B870A01A

pinch rollers will develop a coating of Look at a tape before you insert it.
tape residue that can result in dete- Your car uses a fixed rod antenna to
If the tape is loose, tighten it by receive both AM and FM broadcast
rioration of sound quality, such as a turning one of the hubs with a pencil signals.
wavering sound. They should be or your finger.
cleaned monthly using a commer- This antenna is a removable type. To
If the label is peeling off, do not put remove the antenna, turn the antenna
cially available head cleaning tape or it in the drive mechanism. counterclockwise. To install the an-
special solution available from audio Do not leave tapes sitting where they
specialty shops. Follow the supplier's tenna, turn the antenna clockwise.
are exposed to hot, warm, or high
directions carefully and never oil any humidity, such as on top of the dash-
part of the tape player unit. board or in the player.
o Always be sure that the tape is tightly If a tape is exposed to excessively
wound on its reel before inserting in hot or cold, let it reach a moderate
the player. Rotate a pencil in the temperature before putting it in the
drive sprockets to wind up any slack. player.
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
138

B870C01A-GAT B870B01Y-AAT
Manual Antenna Power Antenna (If installed)
! CAUTION:
o Be sure to remove the antenna
before washing the car in an auto-
matic car wash or the antenna may
be damaged.
o When reinstalling your antenna, it
is important that it is fully tight-
ened to ensure proper reception.

B870C01E B870B01E

Your car uses a manual stainless steel The antenna will automatically be ex-
antenna to receive both AM and FM tended when the radio power switch is
broadcast signals. Pull up the antenna turned on while the ignition key is in
using your fingers, as shown in the either the "ON" or "ACC" position. The
drawing. antenna will automatically be retracted
and stored when either the radio power
NOTE: switch is turned off or the ignition key is
Before entering an automatic car set to the "LOCK" position.
wash or a place with a low height
clearance, be sure that the antenna is
fully retracted.
 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
139

B870D01Y-GAT
Glass Antenna (If installed)
! CAUTION: ! CAUTION:
o Before turning on the radio, make o Do not clean the inner side of the
sure that no one is near the an- rear window glass with an abra-
tenna. sive type of glass cleaner or use a
o Before entering an automatic car scraper to remove foreign depos-
wash or a place with a low height its from the inner surface of the
clearance, turn off the radio and glass as this may cause damage
be sure that the antenna is re- to the antenna elements.
tracted and stored. o Avoid adding metallic coating
o If the antenna is dirty, be sure to (Such as Ni, Cd, and so on). These
clean it in order to avoid an opera- can disturb receiving AM and FM
B870D01E
tion malfunction. broadcast signals.
When the radio power switch is turned
on while the ignition key is in either the
"ON" or "ACC" position, your car will
receive both AM and FM broadcast
signals through the antenna in the rear
window glass.
 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

Before Starting the Engine ........................................... 2-3

Key Positions................................................................ 2-4
Starting ......................................................................... 2-5
Operating the Manual Transaxle ................................. 2-7 2
Automatic Transaxle .................................................... 2-9
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................................. 2-14
Traction Control System (TCS) .................................. 2-15
Driving for Economy ................................................... 2-17

2
Smooth Cornering ...................................................... 2-19
Winter Driving ............................................................. 2-19
Trailer or Vehicle Towing ........................................... 2-22
2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
2

C010A01A-AAT

! WARNING: ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!

Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle,
open the windows immediately.
o Do not inhale exhaust fumes.
Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death
by asphyxiation.
o Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.
The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose.
If you hear a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side
of the car, have the exhaust system checked as soon as possible by your Hyundai dealer.
o Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.
Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run the
engine in your garage any longer than it takes to start the engine and back the car out.
o Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the car.
If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the car, be sure to do so only in
an open area with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn
into the interior.
If you must drive with the trunk lid / tail gate open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary:
1. Close all windows.
2. Open side vents.
3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher
speeds.
To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of
the windshield are kept clear of snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions.
 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
2
BEFORE STARTING THE TO START THE ENGINE 3
ENGINE
C020A01O-GAT 9. When you turn the ignition switch to C030A01A-GAT

Before you start the engine, you should "ON", check that all appropriate COMBINATION IGNITION
always: warning lights are operating and SWITCH
that you have sufficient fuel.
Before starting the engine:
1. Look around the vehicle to be sure 10.Check the operation of warning
there are no flat tires, puddles of oil, lights and all bulbs when key is in
o If your Hyundai is equipped with a
water or other indications of pos- the "ON" position.
manual transaxle, place the shift
sible trouble. lever in neutral and depress the
2. After entering the car, check to be
sure the parking brake is engaged. ! WARNING
clutch pedal fully.
o If your Hyundai has an automatic
3. Check that all windows and lights are transaxle, place the shift lever in "P"
clean. (DIESEL ENGINE):
To ensure that sufficient vacuum (park).
4. Check that the interior and exterior o To start the engine, insert the igni-
mirrors are clean and in position. exists within the brake system dur-
ing cold weather start-up condi- tion key and turn it to the "START"
5. Check your seat, seatback and position. Release it as soon as the
headrest to be sure they are in their tions, it is necessary to run the
engine at idle for several seconds engine starts. Do not hold the key in
proper positions. the "START" position for more than
6. Lock all the doors. after starting the engine.
15 seconds.
7. Fasten your seat belt and be sure
that all other occupants have fas-
NOTE:
tened theirs.
8. Turn off all lights and accessories For safety, the engine will not start
if the shift lever is not in "P" or "N"
that are not needed.
Position (Automatic Transaxle).
2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
4 KEY POSITIONS

C040A01A-AAT
NOTE: NOTE:
Do not hold the key in the "START" To unlocking the steering wheel,
! WARNING:
position for more than 15 seconds. insert the key, and then turn the
steering wheel and key simulta-
The engine should not be turned neously.
off or the key removed from the
o "ON"
ignition key cylinder while the ve- When the key is in the "ON" position,
hicle is in motion. The steering the ignition is on and all accessories
C070C01A-AAT
wheel is locked by removing the may be turned on. If the engine is not
key. running, the key should not be left in To remove the ignition key
the "ON" position. This will discharge ACC
the battery and may also damage the
ignition system. LOCK ON
ACC
LOCK ON o "ACC"
With the key in the "ACC" position, the
some electrical accessories (radio etc.)
may be operated. START

START o "LOCK"
C070C01E
The key can be removed or inserted in
C040A01E this position. 1. Turn the ignition key to the "ACC"
To protect against theft, the steering position.
o "START" wheel locks by removing the key. 2. Simultaneously push and turn the
The engine is started in this position. It ignition key counterclockwise from
will crank until you release the key. the "ACC" position to the "LOCK"
position.
3. The key can be removed in the
"LOCK" position.
 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
2
STARTING 5

C050A01A-GAT C051A01O-GAT C050B02S-GAT

Starting For The Gasoline Starting For The Diesel Engine NORMAL CONDITIONS
Engine ENGINE COLD The Starting Procedure:
o Turn the ignition key to position 1. Insert key, and fasten the seat belt.
"ON" and wait for the pre-heat indi- 2. Depress the clutch pedal fully and
cator light to go out. place the gearshift lever (manual
o Operate the starter until the engine transaxle) in neutral or the selector
runs. lever (automatic transaxle) in "P"
(park) position.
ENGINE WARM 3. After turning the ignition key to the
Operate the starter. If the engine does "ON" position, make certain all warn-
not respond on the first attempt, wait ing lights and gauges are function-
several seconds and try again using ing properly before starting the en-
C050A01E
the pre-heat. gine.
4. On vehicles equipped with the die-
sel preheat indicator light, turn the
! WARNING:
ignition key to the "ON" position.
The diesel pre-heat indicator light
Never run the engine in a closed or will first illuminate in amber, and
poorly ventilated area any longer then after a short time, the amber
than is needed to move your car in illumination will goes off, indicating
or out of the area. The carbon mon- that preheating is completed.
oxide gas emitted is odorless and
can cause serious injury or death.
2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
6

C055B01B-GAT
STARTING AND STOPPING THE
! WARNING: ENGINE FOR TURBO CHARGER
Amber lamp ON Amber lamp OFF
Be sure that the clutch is fully de- INTERCOOLER
pressed when starting a manual (DIESEL ENGINE)
transaxle vehicle. Otherwise there
is the potential to cause damage to (1) Do not race the engine or sudden
the vehicle or injury to someone accelerate the engine immediately
inside or outside the vehicle as a after start it. If the engine is cold,
result of the forward or backward allow the engine to idle for several
movement of the vehicle that will seconds before it is driven to en-
C050B01HP
occur if the clutch is not depressed sure sufficient lubrication of the
when the vehicle is started. turbo charger unit.
NOTE: (2) After high speed or extended driv-
If the engine was not started 10 ing, requiring a heavy engine load,
seconds after the preheating is com- 5. Turn the ignition key to the "START" the engine should be allowed to idle
pleted, turn the ignition key once position and release it when the about 1 minute before turning it off.
more to the "LOCK" position, and engine starts. This idle time will allow the turbo
then to the "ON" position, in order charger to cool prior to shutting the
to preheat again. engine off.

! WARNING:
Do not turn the engine off immedi-
ately after it has been subjected to
a heavy load. Doing so may cause
severe damage to the engine or
turbo charger unit.
 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
2
MANUAL TRANSAXLE 7

C070A02A-AAT
NOTE:
OPERATING THE MANUAL
TRANSAXLE
o To shift into reverse, rest the le-
ver in neutral for at least 3 sec-
! CAUTION:
onds after your car is completely When downshifting from fifth gear
stopped. Then move the lever to fourth gear, caution should be
into the reverse position. taken not to inadvertently press the
o During cold weather, shifting may gear lever sideways in such a man-
be difficult until the transaxle lu- ner that second gear is engaged.
bricant has warmed up. This is Such a drastic downshift may cause
normal and not harmful to the the engine speed to increase to the
transaxle. point that the tachometer will enter
o If you 've come to a complete the red-zone. Such over-revving of
stop and it's hard to shift into 1st the engine may possibly cause en-
or R(Reverse), put the shift lever gine damage.
HXDFL1023
in N(Neutral) position and release
Your Hyundai's manual transaxle has the clutch. Press the clutch pedal
a conventional shift pattern. This shift back down, and then shift into
pattern is imprinted on the shift knob. 1st or R(Reverse) gear position.
The transaxle is fully synchronized in o Do not use the shift lever as a
all forward gears so shifting to either a handrest during driving, as this
higher or a lower gear is easily accom- can result in premature wear of
plished. the transaxle shift forks.
2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
8

C070B02A-AAT C070E03A-GAT o Slow down before shifting to a lower

Using the Clutch RECOMMENDED SHIFT POINTS gear. This will help avoid over-rev-
The clutch should be pressed all the ving the engine, which can cause
way to the floor before shifting, then Shift
damage.
released slowly. The clutch pedal Recommended o Slow down when you encounter
from-to cross winds. This gives you much
should always be used after fully re-
leased while driving. Do not rest your 1-2 20 km/h (15 mph) better control of your car.
foot on the clutch pedal while driving. 2-3 40 km/h (25 mph) o Be sure the car is completely stopped
This can cause unnecessary wear. Do before you attempt to shift into re-
3-4 55 km/h (35 mph)
not partially engage the clutch to hold verse. The transaxle can be dam-
4-5 75 km/h (45 mph) aged if you do not. To shift into
the car on an incline. This causes
unnecessary wear. Use the parking reverse, depress the clutch, move
brake to hold the car on an incline. Do the shift lever to neutral, wait three
The shift points as shown above are
not operate the clutch pedal rapidly and seconds, then shift to the reverse
recommended for optimum fuel
repeatedly. position.
economy and performance.
o Exercise extreme caution when driv-
ing on a slippery surface. Be espe-
C070D02O-AAT cially careful when braking, acceler-
Good Driving Practices ating or shifting gears. On a slippery
o Never take the car out of gear and surface, an abrupt change in ve-
coast down a hill. This is extremely hicle speed can cause the drive
hazardous. Always leave the car in wheels to lose traction and the ve-
gear. hicle to go out of control.
o Don't "ride" the brakes. This can
cause them to overheat and mal-
function. Instead, when you are driv-
ing down a long hill, slow down and
shift to a lower gear. When you do
this, engine braking will help slow the
car.
 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
2
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE 9

C090A01E-GAT
(1.6 DOHC)
! WARNING:
! CAUTION:
o Avoid high cornering speeds. Never shift into "R" or "P" position
o Do not make quick steering wheel while the vehicle is moving.
movements, such as sharp lane
changes or fast, sharp turns.
o Always wear your seat belts.
In a collision, an unbelted person
is significantly more likely to die
than a person wearing a seat belt.
o The risk of rollover is greatly in-
creased if you lose control of your
C090A02E
vehicle at highway speeds.
o Loss of control often occurs if two The highly efficient Hyundai automatic
or more wheels drop off the road- transaxle has four forward speeds and
way and the driver oversteers to one reverse speed. It has a conven-
reenter the roadway. tional shift pattern as shown in the HXD006
o In the event your vehicle leaves illustration. At night, with the first posi-
the roadway, do not steer sharply. tion of the multi-function switch, the NOTE:
Instead, slow down before pulling appropriate symbol on the shift pattern Depress the brake pedal and
back into the travel lanes. indicator will be illuminated according push the button when shifting.
o Never exceed posted speed limits. to the range selected. Push the button when shifting.
The selector lever can be shifted
freely.

For optimum fuel economy, acceler-

ate gradually. The transaxle will auto-
matically shift to the second, third and
overdrive gears.
2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
10

C090P01A-GAT C090Q01E-GAT
Overdrive Switch (1.6 DOHC) (1.8 / 2.0 DOHC)
! CAUTION:
Never shift into "R" or "P" position
while the vehicle is moving.

C090P01E C090A02E-1

When the overdrive switch is turned The highly efficient Hyundai automatic
on, the transaxle will automatically transaxle has four forward speeds and
upshift to the second, third and over- one reverse speed. It has a conven- HXD007
drive gears. When the overdrive switch tional shift pattern as shown in the
is turned off, the transaxle will not illustration. At night, with the multi- NOTE:
upshift to the overdrive gear. For nor- function switch turned on to the park- Depress the brake pedal and
mal driving, the selector lever should ing light or headlight position, the ap- push the button when shifting.
be left in the "D" position and the propriate symbol on the shift pattern Push the button when shifting.
overdrive switch turned on. indicator will be illuminated according The selector lever can be shifted
If you need to accelerate rapidly, press to the range selected. freely.
the accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor. The transaxle will automatically The first few shifts on a new vehicle, or
shift to a lower gear, depending on the if the battery has been disconnected
vehicle speed and load. and reinstalled, may be somewhat
abrupt. This is a normal condition, and
the shifting sequence will adjust after
 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
2
11

shifts are cycled a few times by the C090C01A-AAT C090Q01E-GAT

T.C.M (Transaxle Control Module.) o R (Reverse): o 3 (Third gear) : 1.8 / 2.0 DOHC
Use for backing up the vehicle. Bring Use for towing a trailer during hill climb-
the car to a complete stop before shift- ing or to use engine braking downhill.
C090B01A-AAT
ing the selector lever to "R" position. "3" automatically shifts between 1st,
The Function of Each Position Is 2nd and 3rd gears. This means that no
shift-up to 4th gear is performed. How-
As Follows:
C090D02A-AAT ever, the shift-up to 4th gear is done
o N (Neutral): when the car speed exceeds a certain
o P (Park): value to prevent the engine from over-
In the "N" position, the transaxle is in
Use to hold the vehicle in place when revving. Manually move the selector to
neutral position, which means that no
parking or while starting the engine; "D" when returning to normal driving
gears are engaged. The engine can be
shift the selector lever to the "P" (Park) condition.
started with the shift lever in "N" posi-
position. Whenever parking the car, tion, although this is not recommended
apply the parking brake and shift the except if the engine stalls while the car
selector lever to the "P" (Park) posi- is moving. C090F01A-AAT
tion.
o 2 (Second gear):
Use for driving on a slippery road, hill
! CAUTION:
C090E01A-GAT
o D (Drive): climbing or engine braking downhill.
Never place the selector lever in the "2" automatically shifts between first
Use for normal driving. The transaxle
"P" (Park) position unless the ve- and second gears.
will automatically shift through a four-
hicle is fully stopped. Failure to This means that no shift-up to 3rd gear
gear sequence. Never downshift manu-
observe this caution will cause se- is performed. However, the shift-up to
ally to "2" position or "L" position when
vere damage to the transaxle. third gear is done when the car speed
vehicle speed is more than 95 km/h
exceeds a certain value to prevent the
(60 mph).
engine from over-revving. Manually
move the selector to "D" returning to
normal driving condition.
2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
12

C090G01S-GAT C090H01E-GAT C090I02E-GAT

o L (Low gear): NOTE:
Use for driving up a very steep grade or o For smooth and safe operation,
depress the brake pedal when
! CAUTION:
for engine braking when descending
shifting from "N" (Neutral) posi- o Shift into "R" and "P" position
steep hills. When downshifting to "L",
tion or "P" (Park) position to a only when the vehicle has com-
the transaxle will temporarily remain in
forward or "R" (Reverse) gear. pletely stopped.
second gear until the vehicle has
o The brake pedal fully depressed o Do not accelerate the engine in
slowed enough for low gear to engage.
in order to move the shift lever reverse or any of the forward
Do not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) in low
from the "P" (Park) position to positions with the brakes applied.
gear.
any of the other positions. o Always apply the footbrake when
"L" shifts to 1st gear only. However,
o It is always possible to shift from shifting from "P" or "N", to "R",
shift up to 2nd is performed when the
"R", "N", "D", "3"(1.8 / 2.0 DOHC), "D","3"(1.8 / 2.0 DOHC), "2" or
car exceeds a certain speed and, as
"2", "L" position to "P" position. "L" position.
speed increases, the transaxle will shift
The vehicle must be fully stopped o Do not use the "P" (Park) posi-
up to 3rd gear to prevent over-revving
to avoid trans©23 tion in place of the parking brake.
the engine.
axle damage. Always set the parking brake,
shift the transaxle into "P" (Park)
position and turn off the ignition
when you leave the vehicle, even
momentarily. Never leave the
vehicle unattended while the en-
gine is running.
o Check the automatic transaxle
fluid level regularly, and add fluid
as necessary.
See the maintenance schedule
for the proper fluid recommen-
dation.
 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
2
13

C090N03A-AAT o Exercise extreme caution when driv-

Good Driving Practices ing on a slippery surface. Be espe-
cially careful when braking, acceler-
! WARNING:
o Never move the gear selector lever
from "P" or "N" to any other position ating or shifting gears. On a slippery o Avoid high cornering speeds.
with the accelerator pedal de- surface, an abrupt change in ve- o Do not make quick steering wheel
pressed. hicle speed can cause the drive movements, such as sharp lane
o Never move the gear selector lever wheels to lose traction and the ve- changes or fast, sharp turns.
into "P" when the vehicle is in mo- hicle to go out of control. o Always wear your seat belts.
tion. o Turn the overdrive switch on for In a collision, an unbelted person
o Be sure the car is completely stopped good fuel economy and smooth driv- is significantly more likely to die
before you attempt to shift into "R". ing. If engine braking is needed in than a person wearing a seat belt.
o Never take the car out of gear and the "D" range or if repeated upshift- o The risk of rollover is greatly in-
coast down a hill. This may be ex- ing and downshifting between 3rd creased if you lose control of your
tremely hazardous. Always leave and 4th gear is needed when climb- vehicle at highway speeds.
the car in gear when moving. ing a gentle slope, it is recommended o Loss of control often occurs if two
o Do not "ride" the brakes. This can that the overdrive switch be turned or more wheels drop off the road-
cause them to overheat and mal- off. Turn the overdrive switch back way and the driver oversteers to
function. Instead, when you are driv- on immediately afterward. reenter the roadway.
ing down a long hill, slow down and o In the event your vehicle leaves
shift to a lower gear. When you do the roadway, do not steer sharply.
this, engine braking will help slow Instead, slow down before pulling
the car. back into the travel lanes.
o Slow down before shifting to a lower o Never exceed posted speed limits.
gear. Otherwise, the lower gear may o Excessive depressing of the
not be engaged. accelerater pedal under the tire
o Always use the parking brake. Do slip condition such as moving out
not depend on placing the transaxle of the mud or fresh snow etc, may
in "P" to keep the car from moving. cause severe damage to the
transaxle. At this time, take other
way such as towing.
2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
14 ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

C120A02A-AAT
(If installed) During these conditions, the ve-
! WARNING: hicle should be driven at reduced
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is speeds:
designed to prevent wheel lock-up ABS will not prevent accidents due
during sudden braking or on hazard- to improper or dangerous driving
maneuvers. Even though vehicle o On rough, gravel or snow-cov-
ous road surfaces. The ABS control ered roads.
module monitors the wheel speed and control is improved during emer-
gency braking, always maintain a o With tire chains installed.
controls the pressure applied to each o On roads where the road surface
brake. Thus, in emergency situations safe distance between you and ob-
jects ahead. Vehicle speeds should is pitted or has different surface
or on slick roads, ABS will increase height.
vehicle control during braking. always be reduced during extreme
road conditions.
The braking distance for cars The safety features of an ABS
NOTE: equipped vehicle should not be
During ABS operation, a slight pul- equipped with an anti-lock braking
system may be longer than for those tested by high speed driving or
sation may be felt in the brake pedal cornering. This could endanger the
when the brakes are applied. Also, without it in the following road con-
ditions. safety of yourself or others.
a noise may be heard in the engine
compartment while braking. These
conditions are normal and indicate
that the anti-lock brake system is
functioning properly.
 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
2
TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS) 15

C300A02Y-GAT
Driving hints C310B01O-AAT
(If installed) TCS ON/OFF Mode
TCS does not actively apply brakes.
Be sure to decelerate the car suffi- When the TCS is running, the TCS
ciently before entering curves. indicator in the instrument cluster will
blink.
If you turn the system off by pressing
! CAUTION:
the TCS switch, the TCS-OFF indica-
tor will come on and stay on. In the
When the TCS indicator blinks, SLIP TCS-OFF mode, the SLIP control will
control has been activated. It also be deactivated. Adjust you driving ac-
means that the road is slippery or cordingly. To turn the system back on,
your car is accelerating excessively. press the switch again. The TCS-OFF
In this situation, gently release foot indicator should go off.
C300A02E
pressure from the accelerator pedal
On slippery road surfaces, the traction and maintain moderate speed. NOTE:
control system (TCS) limits the drive
1) The TCS mode will automatically
wheels from spinning excessively, thus
be turned "ON" after the engine
helping the car to accelerate. It also
provides sufficient driving force and ! WARNING:
is turned off and restarted.
2) When the traction control sys-
steering performance as the car turns Traction control is only a driving tem is operating properly, you
at accelerated speeds. aid; all normal precautions for driv- can feel a slight pulsation in the
ing in inclement weather and on vehicle. This is only the effect of
SLIP Control slippery driving surfaces should be brake control and indicates noth-
Limits the drive wheels from spinning observed. ing unusual.
excessively during starting or while 3) When the engine starts, a click is
making accelerated turns on slippery heard from the engine compart-
roads to avoid losing the driving force ment; however, this is only the
of the front wheels. sound of traction control being
checked.
2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
16

4) When moving out of the mud or If the indicator remains lit even after C130A01A-AAT

fresh snow, pressing the accel- the engine has been started, have Good braking practices
erator pedal may not cause the your car checked by an authorized
engine speed to increase due to
TCS operation.
Hyundai dealer. ! WARNING:
NOTE: Nothing should be carried on top of
1) When the TCS-OFF indicator il- the shelf panel behind the rear seat.
luminates, traction control is au- If there were an accident or a sud-
C310D01O-AAT
tomatically deactivated for safety. den stop, such objects could move
Indicators and Warning
2) This warning function is not pro- forward and cause damage to the
The TCS indicators should illuminate vided when the driver selects the vehicle or injure the occupants.
when the ignition key is turned to "ON" TCS-OFF mode.
or "START" but should go out after o After being parked, check to be sure
three seconds. the parking brake is not engaged
If the indicators do not illuminate, or and that the parking brake indicator
the TCS or TCS-OFF indicator does light is out before driving away.
not go out after 3 seconds, have it o Driving through water may get the
checked by an authorized dealer. brakes wet. They can also get wet
when the car is washed. Wet brakes
Should there be any unusual condi- can be dangerous! Your car will not
tions in the device while driving, TCS- stop as quickly if the brakes are wet.
OFF indicator illuminates as a warn- Wet brakes may cause the car to
ing. pull to one side. To dry the brakes,
If TCS-OFF indicator illuminates, pull apply the brakes lightly until the
your car to a safe place and stop the braking action returns to normal,
engine. taking care to keep the car under
Then, start the engine again to check control at all times. If the braking
if the TCS-OFF indicator goes out. action does not return to normal,
stop as soon as it is safe to do so
and call your Hyundai dealer for
assistance.
 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
2
DRIVING FOR ECONOMY 17

o Don't coast down hills with the car gear (manual transaxle). If your car C140A01A-GAT

out of gear. This is extremely haz- is facing downhill, turn the front You can save fuel and get more kilo-
ardous. Keep the car in gear at all wheels into the curb to help keep the meters from your car if you follow
times, use the brakes to slow down, car from rolling. If your car is facing these suggestions:
then shift to a lower gear so that uphill, turn the front wheels away
engine braking will help you main- from the curb to help keep the car o Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a
tain a safe speed. from rolling. moderate rate. Don't make "jack-
o Don't "ride" the brake pedal. Rest- If there is no curb or if it is required rabbit" starts or full-throttle shifts
ing your foot on the brake pedal by other conditions to keep the car and maintain a steady cruising
while driving can be dangerous be- from rolling, block the wheels. speed. Don't race between stop-
cause it can result in the brakes o Under some conditions your park- lights. Try to adjust your speed to
overheating and losing their effec- ing brake can freeze in the engaged that of the other traffic so you don't
tiveness. It also increases the wear position. This is most likely to hap- have to change speeds unneces-
of the brake components. pen when there is an accumulation sarily. Avoid heavy traffic whenever
o If a tire goes flat while you are of snow or ice around or near the possible.
driving, apply the brakes gently and rear brakes or if the brakes are wet. Always maintain a safe distance
keep the car pointed straight ahead If there is a risk that the parking from other vehicles so you can avoid
while you slow down. When you are brake may freeze, apply it only tem- unnecessary braking. This also re-
moving slowly enough for it to be porarily while you put the gear se- duces brake wear.
safe to do so, pull off the road and lector lever in "P" (automatic) or in o Drive at a moderate speed. The
stop in a safe place. first or reverse gear (manual faster you drive, the more fuel your
o If your car is equipped with an auto- transaxle) and block the rear wheels car uses. Driving at a moderate
matic transaxle, don't let your car so the car cannot roll. Then release speed, especially on the highway, is
creep forward. To avoid creeping the parking brake. one of the most effective ways to
forward, keep your foot on the brake o Do not hold the vehicle on the up- reduce fuel consumption.
pedal when the car is stopped. grade with the accelerator pedal. o Don't "ride" the brake or clutch pedal.
o Use caution when parking on a hill. This can cause the transmission to This can increase fuel consumption
Engage the parking brake and place overheat. Always use the brake and also increase wear on these
the gear selector lever in "P" (auto- pedal or parking brake.
matic transaxle) or in first or reverse
2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
18

components. In addition, driving with o Keep your car clean. For maximum This can be avoided by shifting at
your foot resting on the brake pedal service, your Hyundai should be the recommended speeds.
may cause the brakes to overheat, kept clean and free of corrosive o Use your air conditioning sparingly.
which reduces their effectiveness materials. It is especially important The air conditioning system is oper-
and may lead to more serious con- that mud, dirt, ice, etc. not be al- ated by engine power so your fuel
sequences. lowed to accumulate on the under- economy is reduced when you use
o Take care of your tires. Keep them side of the car. This extra weight it.
inflated to the recommended pres- can result in increased fuel con-
sure. Incorrect inflation, either too sumption and also contribute to cor-
much or too little, results in unnec- rosion.
essary tire wear. Check the tire pres- o Travel lightly. Don't carry unneces-
sures at least once a month. sary weight in your car. Weight re-
o Be sure that the wheels are aligned duces fuel economy.
correctly. Improper alignment can o Don't let the engine idle longer than
result from hitting curbs or driving necessary. If you are waiting (and
too fast over irregular surfaces. Poor not in traffic), turn off your engine
alignment causes faster tire wear and restart only when you're ready
and may also result in other prob- to go.
lems as well as greater fuel con- o Remember, your Hyundai does not
sumption. require extended warm-up. As soon
o Keep your car in good condition. For as the engine is running smoothly,
better fuel economy and reduced you can drive away. In very cold
maintenance costs, maintain your weather, however, give your engine
car in accordance with the mainte- a slightly longer warm-up period.
nance schedule in Section 5. If you o Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine.
drive your car in severe conditions, Lugging is driving too slowly in too
more frequent maintenance is re- high a gear resulting in the engine
quired (see Section 5 for details). bucking. If this happens, shift to a
lower gear. Over-revving is racing
the engine beyond its safe limit.
 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
2
SMOOTH CORNERING WINTER DRIVING 19

C150A01A-AAT C160A01A-AAT Also, apply the brake gently. It should

Avoid braking or gear changing in cor- The more severe weather conditions be noted that installing tire chains on
ners, especially when roads are wet. of winter result in greater wear and the tire will provide a greater driving
Ideally, corners should always be taken other problems. To minimize the prob- force, but will not prevent side skids.
under gentle acceleration. If you follow lems of winter driving, you should fol-
these suggestions, tire wear will be low these suggestions: NOTE:
held to a minimum. Tire chains are not legal in all prov-
inces. Check province laws before
fitting tire chains.
C160B01A-GAT
Snowy or Icy Conditions
To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it
may be necessary to use snow tires or
C160C01A-AAT
to install tire chains on your tires. If
snow tires are needed, it is necessary Use High Quality Ethylene
to select tires equivalent in size and Glycol Coolant
type to the original equipment tires. Your Hyundai is delivered with high
Failure to do so may adversely affect quality ethylene glycol coolant in the
the safety and handling of your car. cooling system. It is the only type of
Speeding, rapid acceleration, sudden coolant that should be used because it
brake applications, and sharp turns helps prevent corrosion in the cooling
are potentially very hazardous prac- system, lubricates the water pump and
tices. During deceleration, use engine prevents freezing. Be sure to replace
braking to the fullest extent. Sudden or replenish your coolant in accor-
brake applications on snowy or icy dance with the maintenance schedule
roads may cause skids to occur. You in Section 5. Before winter, have your
need to keep sufficient distance be- coolant tested to assure that its freez-
tween the vehicle in front and your ing point is sufficient for the tempera-
vehicle. tures anticipated during the winter.
2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
20

C160D01A-AAT C160G02A-GAT C160H01A-AAT

Check Battery and Cables To Keep Locks from Freezing Use Approved Anti-Freeze in
Winter puts additional burdens on the To keep the locks from freezing, squirt Window Washer System
battery system. Visually inspect the an approved de-icer fluid or glycerine To keep the water in the window washer
battery and cables as described in into the key opening. If a lock is cov- system from freezing, add an approved
Section 6. The level of charge in your ered with ice, squirt it with an approved anti-freeze solution in accordance with
battery can be checked by your Hyundai de-icing fluid to remove the ice. If the instructions on the container. Window
dealer or a service station. lock is frozen internally, you may be washer anti-freeze is available from
able to thaw it out by using a heated Hyundai dealers and most auto parts
key. Handle the heated key with care outlets. Do not use engine coolant or
C160E01A-AAT
to avoid injury. other types of anti-freeze as these
Change to "Winter Weight" Oil if
may damage the finish.
Necessary NOTE:
In some climates it is recommended The proper temperature for using
that a lower viscosity "winter weight" the immobilizer key is from -40°C (-
oil be used during cold weather. See 40°F) to 80°C(176°F). If you heat the
Section 9 for recommendations. If you immobilizer key over 80°C to open
aren't sure what weight oil you should the frozen lock, it may cause dam-
use, consult your Hyundai dealer. age to the transponder in its head.

C160F01A-AAT
Check Spark Plugs and Ignition
System
Inspect your spark plugs as described
in Section 6 and replace them if neces-
sary. Also check all ignition wiring and
components to be sure they are not
cracked, worn or damaged in any way.
 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
2
21

C160I01A-AAT C160J01A-AAT C170A01A-AAT

Don't Let Your Parking Brake Don't Let Ice and Snow Accumu- HIGHER SPEED MOTORING
Freeze late Underneath Pre-Trip Inspections
Under some conditions your parking Under some conditions, snow and ice 1. Tires:
brake can freeze in the engaged posi- can build up under the fenders and Adjust the tire inflation pressures to
tion. This is most likely to happen interfere with the steering. When driv- specification. Low tire inflation pres-
when there is an accumulation of snow ing in severe winter conditions where sures will result in overheating and
or ice around or near the rear brakes or this may happen, you should periodi- possible failure of the tires.
if the brakes are wet. If there is a risk cally check underneath the car to be Avoid using worn or damaged tires
the parking brake may freeze, apply it sure the movement of the front wheels which may result in reduced traction or
only temporarily while you put the gear and the steering components is not tire failure.
selector lever in "P" (automatic) or in obstructed.
first or reverse gear (manual transaxle) NOTE:
and block the rear wheels so the car Never exceed the maximum tire in-
cannot roll. Then release the parking flation pressure shown on the tires.
C160K01A-AAT
brake.
Carry Emergency Equipment
2. Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil:
Depending on the severity of the High speed travel consumes more fuel
weather where you drive your car, you than urban motoring. Do not forget to
should carry appropriate emergency check both engine coolant and engine
equipment. Some of the items you oil.
may want to carry include tire chains,
tow straps or chains, flashlight, emer- 3. Drive belt:
gency flares, sand, a shovel, jumper A loose or damaged drive belt may
cables, a window scraper, gloves, result in overheating of the engine.
ground cloth, coveralls, a blanket, etc.
2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
22 TRAILER OR VEHICLE TOWING

C180A01A-AAT C190A02A-GAT C190B01S-AAT

USE OF LIGHTS If you are considering towing with your Trailer Hitches
Check your lights regularly for correct car, you should first check with your Select the proper hitch and ball combi-
operation and always keep them clean. Province Department of Motor Vehicles nation, making sure that it's location is
When driving during the day in condi- to determine their legal requirements. compatible with that of the trailer or
tions of poor visibility, it is helpful to Since laws vary from province to prov- vehicle being towed.
drive with headlights on low beam. ince, the requirements for towing trail- Use a quality non-equalizing hitch which
This enables you to be seen as well as ers, cars, other types of vehicles, or distributes the tongue load uniformly
to see. apparatus may differ. Ask your Hyundai throughout the chassis.
dealer for further details before towing.
The hitch should be bolted securely to
the car and installed by a qualified
! CAUTION: technician. DO NOT USE A HITCH
DESIGNED FOR TEMPORARY IN-
Do not do any towing with your car
STALLATION AND NEVER USE ONE
during its first 2,000 km (1,200 miles)
THAT ATTACHES ONLY TO THE
in order to allow the engine to prop-
BUMPER.
erly break in. Failure to heed this
caution may result in serious en-
gine or transaxle damage.
C190C03S-GAT
Trailer Brakes
If your trailer is equipped with a braking
system, make sure it conforms to fed-
eral and/or local regulations and that it
is properly installed and operating cor-
rectly.
 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
2
23

NOTE: C190D01A-GAT C190E02E-GAT

If you tow a trailer or vehicle, your Safety Chains Trailer Weight Limit
car will require more frequent main- Should the hitch connection between
tenance due to the additional load. your car and the trailer or vehicle you
See "Maintenance Under Severe are towing fail, the trailer or vehicle
Usage Conditions" on page 5-7. could wander dangerously across other
lanes of traffic and ultimately collide
with another vehicle. To eliminate this
! CAUTION: potentially dangerous situation, safety
chains, attached between your car and
o Never connect a trailer brake sys-
the trailer or towed vehicle, are re-
tem directly to the vehicle brake Tongue load Total trailer weight
quired in most provinces.
system.
o When towing a trailer on steep C190E01L

grades (in excess of 12%) pay Tongue loads can be increased or

close attention to the engine cool- decreased by redistributing the load in
ant temperature gauge to ensure the trailer. This can be verified by
the engine does not overheat. If checking the total weight of the loaded
the needle of the coolant tem- trailer and then checking the load on
perature gauge moves across the the tongue.
dial towards "H" (HOT), pull over
and stop as soon as it is safe to NOTE:
do so, and allow the engine to 1. Never load the trailer with more
idle until it cools down. You may weight in the back than in the
proceed once the engine has front. About 60% of the trailer
cooled sufficiently. load should be in the front half
on the trailer and the remaining
40% in the rear.
2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
24

GAWR. Improper trailer loading

and/or too much luggage in the
trunk can overload the rear axle.
! CAUTION:
Redistribute the load and check The following specifications are
the axle weight again. recommended when towing a
4. The maximum permissible static trailer. The loaded trailer weight
vertical load on the coupling de- cannot safely exceed the values in
vice ; the following chart.
Gross Axle Weight Gross Vehicle 4 Door 65 kg
Weight kg
5 Door 60 kg
C190E02L Maximum Towable
2. The total gross vehicle weight Weight
with trailer must not exceed the Trailer Tongue
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating With Brake 1.6 L 1,200
(GVWR) shown on the vehicle 4 Door : 65
Type 1.8/2.0 L 1,400
identification plate (see page 8- Coupling point 5 Door : 60
Without Brake Type 550
2). The total gross vehicle weight
is the combined weight of the
vehicle, driver, all passengers
and their luggage, cargo, hitch, ! WARNING:
trailer tongue load and other op-
tional equipment. Improperly loading your car and
3. The front or rear axle weight must trailer can seriously affect its steer-
C190E03E
not exceed the Gross Axle Weight ing and braking performance caus-
Rating (GAWR) shown on the 5. The maximum permissible over- ing a crash which could cause seri-
vehicle identification plate (see hang of the coupling point : 1,095 ous injury or death.
page 8-2). It is possible that your mm
towing package does not exceed
the GVWR but exceeds the
 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
2
25

C190F01E-GAT When being passed by a large ve- 13.Avoid holding the brake pedal down
Trailer or Vehicle Towing Tips hicle, keep a constant speed and too long or too frequently. This could
1. Before towing, check hitch and steer straight ahead. If there is too cause the brakes to overheat, re-
safety chain connections as well as much wind buffeting, slow down to sulting in reduced braking efficiency.
proper operation of the trailer run- get out of the other vehicle's air 14.When going down a hill, shift into a
ning lights, brake lights, and turn turbulence. lower gear and use the engine brak-
signals. 8. When parking your vehicle and trailer, ing effect.
2. Always drive your vehicle at a mod- especially on a hill, be sure to follow When ascending a long grade,
erate speed (Less than 100 km/H) all the normal precautions. Turn your downshift the transmission to a
3. Trailer towing requires more fuel front wheel into the curb, set the lower gear and reduce speed to
than normal conditions. parking brake firmly, and put the reduce chances of engine over-
4. To maintain engine braking effi- transmission in 1st or Reverse loading and/or overheating.
ciency and electrical charging per- (manual) or Park (automatic). In 15.If you have to stop while going
formance, do not use fifth gear addition, place wheel chocks at each uphill, do not hold the vehicle in
(manual transmission) or overdrive of the trailer's tires. place by pressing on the accelera-
(automatic transmission). 9. If the trailer has electric brakes, tor. This can cause the automatic
5. Always secure items in the trailer to start your vehicle and trailer mov- transmission to overheat. Use the
prevent load shift while driving. ing, and then apply the trailer brake parking brake or footbrake.
6. Check the condition and air pres- controller by hand to be sure the
sure of all tires on the trailer and brakes are working. This lets you NOTE:
your vehicle. Low tire pressure can check your electrical connection at When towing check transaxle fluid
seriously affect the handling. Also the same time. more frequently.
check the spare tire. 10.During your trip, check occasion-
7. The vehicle/trailer combination is ally to be sure that the load is
more affected by crosswind and secure, and that the lights and any
buffeting. trailer brakes are still working.
11.Avoid jerky starts, sudden accel-
eration or sudden stops.
12.Avoid sharp turns and rapid lane
changes.
2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
26

! CAUTION:
If overheating should occur when
towing, (temperature gauge reads
near the red zone), taking the follow-
ing actions may reduce or eliminate
the problem.

1. Turn off the air conditioner.

2. Reduce highway speed.
3. Select a lower gear when going
uphill.
4. While in stop and go traffic, place
the gear selector in park or neu-
tral and idle the engine at a higher
speed.
 WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

If the Engine Will not Start .......................................... 3-2

Jump Starting .............................................................. 3-3
If the Engine Overheats .............................................. 3-4
Spare Tire .................................................................... 3-6
If You Have a Flat Tire ................................................ 3-6
3
Changing A Flat Tire ................................................... 3-7
If Your Vehicle Must Be Towed ..................................3-11
Emergency Towing ..................................................... 3-13

3
If You Lose Your Keys................................................3-13
3 WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
2 IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START

D010A01A-AAT D010B02A-AAT D010C01A-AAT

If Engine Doesn't Turn Over or If Engine Turns Over Normally
! WARNING:
Turns Over Slowly but Does Not Start
If the engine will not start, do not
push or pull the car to start it. This
could result in a collision or cause
other damage. In addition, push or
pull starting may cause the cata-
lytic converter to be overloaded and
create a fire hazard.

D010B02E D010C01E

1. If your car has an automatic 1. Check fuel level.

transaxle, be sure the gear selector 2. With the key in the "OFF" position,
lever is in "N" or "P" and the emer- check all connectors at ignition coils
gency brake is set. and spark plugs(For Gasoline En-
2. Check the battery connections to be gine) or check all connectors at
sure they are clean and tight. glow plug and glow plug relay(For
3. Turn on the interior light. If the light Diesel Engine). Reconnect any that
dims or goes out when you operate may be disconnected or loose.
the starter, the battery is discharged. 3. Check fuel line in the engine room.
4. Check the starter connections to be 4. If engine still refuses to start, call a
sure they are securely tightened. Hyundai dealer or seek other quali-
5. Do not push or pull the vehicle to fied assistance.
start it. See instructions for "Jump
Starting".
 WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
3
JUMP STARTING 3

D010D01A-AAT D020A03A-AAT o If you should accidentally get acid on

If the Engine Stalls While your skin or in your eyes, immedi-
Driving ately remove any contaminated cloth-
1. Reduce your speed gradually, keep- ing and flush the area with clean
ing a straight line. Move cautiously water for at least 15 minutes. Then
off the road to a safe place. Discharged promptly obtain medical attention. If
2. Turn on your emergency flashers. battery you must be transported to an emer-
3. Try to start the engine again. If your gency facility, continue to apply wa-
vehicle will not start, contact a ter to the affected area with a sponge
Hyundai dealer or seek other quali- or cloth.
Booster
fied assistance. o The gas produced by the battery
battery
HXDFL523 during the jump-start operation is
highly explosive. Do not smoke or
allow a spark or an open flame in the
! WARNING:
vicinity.
o The battery being used to provide
The gas produced by the battery the jump start must be 12-volt. If you
during the jump-start operation is cannot determine that it is a 12-volt
highly explosive. If these instruc- battery, do not attempt to use it for
tions are not followed exactly, seri- the jump start.
ous personal injury and damage to o To jump start a car with a discharged
the vehicle may occur! If you are battery, follow this procedure ex-
not sure how to follow this proce- actly:
dure, seek qualified assistance.
Automobile batteries contain sul- 1. If the booster battery is installed in
furic acid. This is poisonous and another vehicle, be sure the two
highly corrosive. When jump start- vehicles are not touching.
ing, wear protective glasses and be 2. Turn off all unnecessary lights and
careful not to get acid on yourself, accessories in both vehicles.
your clothing or on the car.
3 WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
4 IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS

3. Attach the clamps of the jumper 6. Carefully remove the jumper cables D030A02A-AAT

cable in the exact location shown. in the reverse order of attachment. If your temperature gauge indicates
first, attach one clamp of the jumper overheating, you experience a loss of
cable to the positive (+) post or If you do not know why your battery power, or hear loud pinging or knock-
cable of the discharged battery. Then became discharged (because the lights ing, the engine is probably too hot. If
attach the other end of the same were left on, etc.), have the charging this happens to you, you should:
cable to the positive (+) post or system checked by your Hyundai
cable of the booster battery. Next, dealer. 1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as
using the other cable, attach one it is safe to do so.
clamp to the negative (-) post or 2. Place the gear selector lever in "P"
cable of the booster battery. Then (automatic) or neutral (manual
attach the other end of that cable to transaxle) and set the parking brake.
a solid metal part of the engine If the air conditioning is on, turn it
away from the battery. Do not con- off.
nect the cable to any moving part. 3. If engine coolant is running out un-
4. Start the engine in the car with the der the car or steam is coming out
booster battery and let it run for a from the hood, stop the engine. Do
few minutes. This will help to as- not open the hood until the engine
sure that the booster battery is fully coolant has stopped running or the
charged. During the jumping opera- steaming has stopped. If there is no
tion, run the engine in this vehicle at visible loss of engine coolant and no
about 2,000 rpm. steam, leave the engine running
5. Start the engine in the car with the and check to be sure the engine
discharged battery using the nor- cooling fan is operating. If the fan is
mal starting procedure. After the not running, turn the engine off.
engine starts, leave the jumper 4. Check to see if the water pump drive
cables connected and let the engine belt is missing. If it is not missing,
run at fast idle or about 2,000 rpm check to see that it is tight. If the
for several minutes. drive belt seems to be satisfactory,
 WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
3
5

check for coolant leaking from the 7. Proceed with caution, keeping alert
radiator, hoses or under the car. (If room while engine is running, since for further signs of overheating. If
the air conditioning had been in use, the high currents in the Common overheating happens again, call a
it is normal for cold water to be Rail system produce considerable Hyundai dealer for assistance.
draining from it when you stop). magnetic fields.

!
! WARNING:
5. If the water pump drive belt is broken
or coolant is leaking out, stop the
CAUTION:
Serious loss of engine coolant indi-
While the engine is running, keep engine immediately and call the near- cates there is a leak in the cooling
hair, hands, and clothing away from est Hyundai dealer for assistance. system and this should be checked
moving parts such as the fan and as soon as possible by a Hyundai
drive belts to prevent injury. dealer.

! WARNING:
! WARNING (Diesel only):
Do not remove the radiator cap when
the engine is hot. This can allow
Never work on injection system with coolant to be blown out of the open-
engine running or within 30 sec- ing and cause serious burns.
onds after shutting off engine. High
pressure pump, rail, injectors and
high pressure pipes are subject to 6. If you cannot find the cause of the
high pressure even after the engine overheating, wait until the engine
stopped. The fuel jet produced by temperature has returned to nor-
fuel leaks may cause serious in- mal. Then, if the engine coolant has
jury, if it touch the body. People been lost, carefully add coolant to
using pacemakers should not move the reservoir (page 6-16) to bring
than 30cm closer to the ECU or the fluid level in the reservoir up to
wiring harness within the engine the halfway mark.
3 WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
6 SPARE TIRE IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE

D040A01A-GAT D040B01A-AAT D050A01A-AAT

The following instructions for the FULL Handling the Spare Tire If a tire goes flat while you are driving:
SIZE spare tire should be observed:
1. Take your foot off the accelerator
Check inflation pressure as soon as pedal and let the car slow down
practical after installing the spare tire, while driving straight ahead. Do not
and adjust to the specified pressure. apply the brakes immediately or at-
The tire pressure should be periodi- tempt to pull off the road as this may
cally checked and maintained at the cause a loss of control. When the
specified pressure while the tire is vehicle has slowed to such a speed
stored. that it is safe to do so, brake carefully
and pull off the road. Drive off the
Spare Tire Pressure road as far as possible and park on
HFC4014
firm, level ground. If you are on a
Tire Size Full Size Remove the installation bolt to remove divided highway, do not park in the
Inflation Pressure 210 kPa (30 psi) the spare tire. To replace the spare tire median area between the two traffic
in its storage compartment, tighten the lanes.
bolt firmly with your fingers until there 2. When the vehicle is stopped, turn on
is no more play in the spare tire. your emergency hazard flashers, set
the parking brake and put the
transaxle in "P" (automatic) or "R"
(manual transaxle).
3. Have all passengers get out of the
vehicle. Be sure they all get out on
the side of the car that is away from
traffic.
4. Change the tire following the in-
structions provided on the following
pages.
 WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
3
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE 7

D060A01A-AAT D060B01E-AAT D060C01A-AAT

1. Obtain Spare Tire and Tool 2. Block the Wheel

Flat tire
Spare tire Jack

D060A01E

The procedure described on the fol- HXD091-1 HXD4005

lowing pages can be used to rotate Remove the spare tire and take out the Block the wheel that is diagonally op-
tires as well as to change a flat tire. jack and tool bag from the trunk. posite from the flat to keep the vehicle
When preparing to change a flat tire, from rolling when the vehicle is raised
check to be sure the gear selector NOTE: on the jack.
lever is in "P" (automatic transaxle) or The jack is located beneath the lug-
reverse gear (manual transaxle) and gage mat in the vehicle trunk.
that the parking brake is set, then:
3 WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
8

D060D01A-AAT D060E01A-AAT D060F02E-AAT

3. Loosen Wheel Nuts 4. Put the Jack in Place 5. Raising the Vehicle

Wrench bar

Wheel nut wrench

HXDFL061 D060W01E HFC4022

The wheel nuts should be loosened The base of the jack should be placed After inserting a wrench bar into the
slightly before raising the car. To loosen on firm, level ground. The jack should wheel nut wrench, install the wrench
the nuts, turn the wrench handle coun- be positioned as shown in the drawing. bar into the jack as shown in the draw-
terclockwise. When doing this, be sure ing. To raise the vehicle, turn the wheel
that the socket is seated completely nut wrench clockwise. As the jack be-
over the nut so it cannot slip off. For gins to raise the vehicle, double check
maximum leverage, position the that it is properly positioned and will
wrench so the handle is to the right as not slip. If the jack is on soft ground or
shown in the drawing. Then, while sand, place a board, brick, flat stone or
holding the wrench near the end of the other object under the base of the jack
handle, pull up on it with steady pres- to keep it from sinking.
sure. Do not remove the nuts at this Raise the car high enough so that the
time. Just loosen them about one-half fully inflated spare tire can be installed.
turn. To do this, you will need more ground
clearance than is required to remove
the flat tire.
 WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
3
9

D060G02Y-AAT
6. Changing Wheels
! WARNING:
Do not get under the car when it is
supported by the jack! This is very
dangerous as the vehicle could fall
and cause serious injury or death.
No one should stay in the car while
the jack is being used.

D060G02E

D060G03E

Loosen the wheel nuts and remove ! WARNING:

them with your fingers. Slide the wheel Wheel and wheel covers may have
off the studs and lay it flat so it cannot sharp edges. Handle them carefully
roll away. To put the wheel on the hub, to avoid possible severe injury.
pick up the spare tire, line up the holes Before putting the wheel into place,
with the studs and slide the wheel onto be sure that there is nothing on the
them. If this is difficult, tip the wheel hub or wheel (such as mud, tar,
slightly and get the top hole in the gravel, etc.) that interferes with the
wheel lined up with the top stud. Then wheel from fitting solidly against
jiggle the wheel back and forth until the the hub. If there is, remove it. If
wheel can be slid over the other studs. there is not good contact on the
mounting surface between the
wheel and hub, the wheel nuts could
loosen and cause the loss of a
3 WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
10

D060I01E-GAT
Wheel nut tightening torque:
wheel. Loss of a wheel may result in 8. Lower Vehicle and Tighten
loss of control of the vehicle. This Nuts Steel wheel & aluminium alloy wheel:
may cause serious injury or death. 900-1,100 kg.cm (65-80 lb.ft)

D060J01E-AAT

D060H02A-AAT
After Changing Wheels
7. Reinstall Wheel Nuts

HXDFL062

Lower the car to the ground by turning

the wheel nut wrench counterclock-
wise. Then position the wrench as
shown in the drawing and tighten the
wheel nuts. Be sure the socket is HXDFL4007

D060H02E
seated completely over the nut. Do not If you have a tire gauge, remove the
stand on the wrench handle or use an valve cap and check the air pressure.
To reinstall the wheel, hold it on the extension pipe over the wrench handle.
studs, put the wheel nuts on the studs If the pressure is lower than recom-
Go around the wheel tightening every mended, drive slowly to the nearest
and tighten them finger tight. The nuts other nut until they are all tight. Then
should be installed with their small service station and inflate to the cor-
double-check each nut for tightness. rect pressure. If it is too high, adjust it
diameter ends directed inward. Jiggle After changing wheels, have a techni-
the tire to be sure it is completely until it is correct. Always reinstall the
cian tighten the wheel nuts to their valve cap after checking or adjusting
seated, then tighten the nuts as much proper torque as soon as possible.
as possible with your fingers again. tire pressure. If the cap is not replaced,
 WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
3
IF YOUR VEHICLE MUST BE 11
TOWED
air may leak from the tire. If you lose a D080A01O-GAT D080B01O-GAT

valve cap, buy another and install it as If your vehicle has to be towed, it Towing the 2 Wheel Drive Ve-
soon as possible. should be done by your Hyundai dealer hicle
After you have changed wheels, al- or a commercial tow truck service. 1)
ways secure the flat tire in its place in This will help assure that your vehicle
the trunk and return the jack and tools is not damaged in towing. Also, profes-
to their proper storage locations. sionals are generally aware of local
laws governing towing. In any case,
rather than risk damage to your car, it
2)
is suggested that you show this infor-
mation to the tow truck operator. Be
sure that a safety chain system is used
and that all local laws are observed.
It is recommended that your vehicle
be towed with a wheel lift and dollies or 3) dolly
flatbed equipment with all the wheels
off the ground.

! CAUTION:
B080B03E
o Your vehicle can be damaged if
towed incorrectly! Your vehicle can be towed by wheel lift
o Be sure the transaxle is in neu- type truck (1), (2) or flatbed equipment
tral. (3).
o When the engine will not start, be
sure the steering is unlocked by
placing the key in the "ACC" po-
sition.
3 WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
12

1) If the vehicle is being towed with the o Automatic Transaxle:

! CAUTION:
rear wheels on the ground, be sure
the parking brake is released.
Be sure to use a towing dolly under
the front wheels.
o When towing the vehicle, take care
not to cause damage to the bumper NOTE:
or underbody of the vehicle. Before towing, check the level of the
automatic transaxle fluid. If it is be-
! CAUTION:
low the "HOT" range on the dipstick,
add fluid. If you cannot add fluid, a
towing dolly must be used.

2) If any of the loaded wheels or sus-

pension components are damaged
or the vehicle is being towed with the
front wheels on the ground, use a
towing dolly under the front wheels.
D080A02E
o Manual Transaxle:
If you do not use a towing dolly, place D080B02E
o Do not tow with sling type truck as the ignition key in the "ACC" position
this may cause damage to the and put the transaxle in "N (Neutral)". A vehicle with an automatic transaxle
bumper or underbody of the ve- should never be towed from the rear
hicle. with the front wheels on the ground.
! CAUTION:
This can cause serious damage to
the transaxle.
Do not tow with the key removed or
in the "LOCK" position when towing 3) It is recommended that your vehicle
from the rear without a towing be towed with all the wheels off the
dolly. ground.
 WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
3
EMERGENCY TOWING IF YOU LOSE YOUR KEYS 13

D080D04A-AAT
NOTE: D120A01A-GAT

Before towing, check the level of the If you lose your keys, many Hyundai
automatic transaxle fluid. If it is be- dealers can make you a new key if you
low the "HOT" range on the dipstick, have your key number. If you lock the
add fluid. If you cannot add fluid, a keys inside your vehicle and you can-
towing dolly must be used. not obtain a new key, many Hyundai
dealers can use special tools to open
the door for you.

Information about the key of immobi-

! CAUTION: lizer system (If installed) will be found
HXD370
If the car is being towed with all four on page 1-5.
wheels on the ground, it can be
For emergency towing when no com- towed only from the front. Be sure
mercial tow vehicle is available, attach that the transaxle is in neutral. Do not
a tow cable, chain or strap to one of the tow at speeds greater than 50 km/h
towing hooks under the front / rear of (30 mph) and for more than 25 km (15
your vehicle. Do not attempt to tow your miles).
vehicle in this manner on any unpaved Be sure the steering is unlocked by
surface. This could result in serious placing the key in the "ACC" posi-
damage to your vehicle. tion. A driver must be in the towed
Nor should towing be attempted if the vehicle to operate the steering and
wheels, drive train, axles, steering or brakes.
brakes are damaged. Before towing,
be sure the transaxle is in neutral and
the key is in "ACC" (with the engine off)
or in the "ON" position (with the engine
running). A driver must be in the towed
vehicle to steer it and operate the brakes.
CORROSION PREVENTION & APPEARANCE CARE

Corrosion Protection .................................................... 4-2

To Help Prevent Corrosion ........................................... 4-3
Washing and Waxing ................................................... 4-4
Cleaning the Interior ..................................................... 4-5

4
4 CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE
2 CORROSION PROTECTION

E010A01A-AAT E010C01A-AAT Mud is particulary corrosive because it

Protecting Your Hyundai from High-Corrosion Areas is slow to dry and holds moisture in
Corrosion If you live in an area where your car is contact with the vehicle. Although the
By using the most advanced design regularly exposed to corrosive materi- mud appears to be dry, it can still retain
and construction practices to combat als, corrosion protection is particularly the moisture and promote corrosion.
corrosion, Hyundai produces cars of important. Some of the common High temperatures can also acceler-
the highest quality, however, this is causes of accelerated corrosion are ate corrosion of parts that are not
only part of the job. To achieve long- road salts, dust control chemicals, properly ventilated so the moisture
term corrosion resistance your Hyundai ocean air and industrial pollution. can be dispersed. For all these rea-
can deliver, the owner's cooperation sons, it is particularly important to keep
and assistance is also required. your car clean and free of mud or
accumulations of other materials. This
E010D01A-AAT applies not only to the visible surfaces
Moisture Breeds Corrosion but particularly to the underside of the
car.
Moisture creates the conditions in
E010B01A-AAT
which corrosion is most likely to occur.
Common Causes of Corrosion For example, corrosion is accelerated
The most common causes of corro- by high humidity, particularly when tem-
sion on your car are: peratures are just above freezing. In
such conditions, the corrosive mate-
o Road salt, dirt and moisture that is rial is kept in contact with the car
allowed to accumulate underneath surfaces by moisture that is slow to
the car. evaporate.
o Removal of paint or protective coat-
ings by stones, gravel, abrasion or
minor scrapes and dents which leave
unprotected metal exposed to cor-
rosion.
 CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE
4
TO HELP PREVENT CORROSION 3

E020A01A-AAT ing it away will accelerate corrosion E020D01A-AAT

You can help prevent corrosion from rather than prevent it. Water under Keep Paint and Trim in Good
starting by observing the following: high pressure and steam are par- Condition
ticularly effective in removing accu- Scratches or chips in the finish should
mulated mud and corrosive materi- be covered with "touch-up" paint as
als. soon as possible to reduce the possi-
E020B01A-AAT o When cleaning lower door panels, bility of corrosion. If bare metal is show-
Keep Your Car Clean rocker panels and frame members, ing through, the attention of a qualified
be sure that drain holes are kept body and paint shop is recommended.
The best way to prevent corrosion is to open so that moisture can escape
keep your car clean and free of corro- and not be trapped inside to ac-
sive materials. Attention to the under- celerate corrosion.
side of the car is particularly important.
E020E01A-AAT

o If you live in a high-corrosion area — Don't Neglect the Interior

E020C01A-AAT
where road salts are used, near the Moisture can collect under the floor
Keep Your Garage Dry
ocean, areas with industrial pollu- mats and carpeting causing corrosion.
tion, acid rain, etc.—, you should Don't park your car in a damp, poorly Check under the mats periodically to be
take extra care to prevent corro- ventilated garage. This creates a fa- sure the carpeting is dry. Use particular
sion. In winter, hose off the under- vorable environment for corrosion. This care if you carry fertilizers, cleaning
side of your car at least once a is particularly true if you wash your car materials or chemicals in the car.
month and be sure to clean the in the garage or drive it into the garage These should be carried only in proper
underside thoroughly when winter when it is still wet or covered with containers and any spills or leaks
is over. snow, ice or mud. Even a heated ga- should be cleaned up, flushed with
o When cleaning underneath the car, rage can contribute to corrosion un- clean water and thoroughly dried.
give particular attention to the com- less it is well ventilated so moisture is
ponents under the fenders and other dispersed.
areas that are hidden from view. Do
a thorough job; just dampening the
accumulated mud rather than wash-
4 CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE
4 WASHING AND WAXING

E030A01A-AAT vents or abrasive cleaning powders as humidity low, you may find it necessary
Washing Your Hyundai these may damage the finish. to rinse each section immediately after
Never wash your car when the surface Use a clean sponge or cloth, rinse it washing to avoid streaking.
is hot from being in the sun. Always frequently and don't damage the finish
wash your car in the shade. by rubbing too hard. For stubborn spots, After rinsing, dry the car using a damp
dampen them frequently and remove chamois or soft, absorbent cloth. The
Wash your car frequently. Dirt is abra- them a little at a time. reason for drying the car is to remove
sive and can scratch the paint if it is not To clean whitewall tires, use a stiff water from the car so it will dry without
removed. Air pollution or acid rain may brush or soapy steel-wool scouring water spots. Don't rub, this can dam-
damage the paint and trim through pad. age the finish.
chemical action if pollutants are al- To clean plastic wheel covers, use a
lowed to remain in contact with the clean sponge or soft cloth and water. If you find any nicks or scratches in
surface. If you live near the ocean or in the paint, use touch-up paint to cover
an area where road salts or dust con- To clean cast aluminum alloy wheels, them to prevent corrosion. To protect
trol chemicals are used, you should use a mild soap or neutral detergent. the paintwork of the car against corro-
pay particular attention to the under- Do not use abrasive cleaners. Protect sion, you must clean your Hyundai (at
side of the car. Start by rinsing the car the bare-metal surfaces by cleaning, least once a month). Give special at-
to remove dust and loose dirt. In win- polishing and waxing. Because alumi- tention to the removal of salt, mud and
ter, or if you have driven through mud num is subject to corrosion, be sure to other substances on the underside of
or muddy water, be sure to thoroughly give aluminum alloy wheels special the splashboards of the car. Make
clean the underside as well. Use a attention in winter. If you drive on sure that the outlets and the underside
hard direct stream of water to remove salted roads, clean the wheels thor- of the doors are open. Paint damage
accumulated mud or corrosive materi- oughly afterwards. can be caused by small accumulation
als. Use a good quality car-washing of tar, industrial precipitation, tree resin,
solution and follow the manufacturer's After washing, be sure to rinse thor- insects and bird droppings, when not
directions on the package. These are oughly. If soapy water dries on the removed immediately. If water alone is
available at your Hyundai dealer or auto finish, streaking will result. not strong enough to remove the accu-
parts outlet. Don't use strong house- mulated dirt, use a mild car washing
hold detergents, gasoline, strong sol- When the weather is warm and the solution. Be sure to rinse the surface
 CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE
4
CLEANING THE INTERIOR 5

after washing to remove the solution. E030D01A-AAT E040A01A-AAT

Never allow the solution to dry on the When to Wax Again To Clean the Vinyl Upholstery
painted surfaces. You should polish and wax the car To clean the vinyl upholstery, first re-
again when water no longer beads on move loose dirt and dust with a vacuum
a clean surface but spreads out over a cleaner. Then apply a solution of mild
E030B01A-AAT larger area. soap or detergent and water using a
Spot Cleaning clean sponge or soft cloth. Allow this to
Don't use gasoline, strong solvents or E030E01A-AAT stay on the surface to loosen the dirt,
corrosive cleaning agents. These can Maintaining Bumpers then wipe with a clean damp sponge or
damage the finish of the car. To re- cloth. If all the dirt stains are not re-
Special precautions must be observed moved, repeat this procedure until the
move road tar, use turpentine on a to preserve the appearance of the
clean, soft cloth or commercially avail- upholstery is clean. Do not use gaso-
bumpers on your Hyundai. They are: line, solvent, paint thinner or other
able bug and tar remover. Be gentle.
To remove dead insects or tree sap, strong cleaners.
o Be careful not to spill battery elec-
use warm water and mild soap or car- trolyte or hydraulic brake fluid on the
washing solution. Soak the spot and bumpers. If you do, wash it off
rub gently. If the paint has lost its immediately with clear water.
luster, use a commercial car-cleaning o Be gentle when cleaning the bumper
polish. surfaces. They are made of soft
plastic and the surface can be dam-
E030C01A-AAT
aged if mistreated. Do not use abra-
Polishing and Waxing sive cleaners. Use warm water and
Always wash and dry the car before mild soap or car-washing solution.
polishing or waxing or using a combi- o Do not expose the bumpers to high
nation cleaner and wax. Use a good temperatures. For example, if you
quality commercial product and follow have your car repainted, do not
the manufacturer's directions on the leave the bumpers on the car if the
container. Polish and wax the bright car is going to be placed in a high-
trim pieces as well as the paint. temperature paint booth.
4 CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE
6

E040B01A-AAT leather and may do more harm than E040D01A-AAT

To Clean the Leather Upholstery good. Varnishes and furniture polishes Cleaning the Seat Belts
(If installed) should never be used under any con- To clean the seat belts, use a cloth or
In the normal course of use, leather ditions. sponge with mild soap or detergent
upholstered surfaces will, like any and warm water. Do not use strong
material, pick-up dust and dirt. This detergents, dye, bleach or abrasive
dust and dirt must be cleaned off or it E040C01A-AAT materials on the seat belts as this may
may work into the surface of the leather, Cleaning the Carpets weaken the fabric.
causing damage. While cleaning the belts, inspect them
Use a foam-type carpet cleaner. Clean- for excessive wear, cuts, fraying or
Fine leather needs care, and should ers of this type are available in aerosol other signs of damage and replace
be cleaned when necessary. Washing cans in liquid form or powder. Read the them if necessary
leather thoroughly with soap and water instructions and follow them exactly.
will keep your leather lustrous, beauti- Using a vacuum cleaner with the ap-
ful and ensure you have many years of propriate attachment, remove as much
E040E01A-AAT
wear. dirt from the carpets as possible. Apply
the foam following the manufacturer's Cleaning the Windows
Take a piece of cheese cloth and using
any mild soap and lukewarm water, directions, then rub in overlapping You may use any household window
work up a good lather. Thoroughly circles. Do not add water. These clean- cleaner on the windows. However,
wash the leather. Wipe clean with a ers work best when the carpet is kept when cleaning the inside of the rear
slightly damp cloth and dry with soft as dry as possible. window be careful not to damage the
cloth. Do this as often as the leather rear window defroster wiring.
becomes soiled.

During tanning operations, sufficient E050A01A-AAT

oils are incorporated through process- Any Questions?
ing that none need be applied during
If you have any questions about the
the life of the leather. Oil applied to the
care of your car, consult your Hyundai
finished surface will in no way help the
dealer.
 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

Maintenance Intervals .................................................. 5-2

Scheduled Maintenance ............................................... 5-4
Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions ............ 5-7
Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Items .............. 5-8

5 5
5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
2 MAINTENANCE INTERVALS

F010A01A-GAT F010B01A-AAT It is suggested that genuine Hyundai

Service Requirements Maintenance Requirements service parts be used for any required
To assure that you receive the great- The maintenance required for your repairs or replacements. Other parts of
est number of kilometers of satisfying Hyundai can be divided into three main equivalent quality such as engine oil,
operation from your Hyundai, certain areas: engine coolant, manual or auto
maintenance procedures must be per- transaxle oil, brake fluid and so on
formed. Although careful design and o Specified scheduled procedures which are not supplied by Hyundai
engineering have reduced these to a o General checks Motor Company or its distributor may
minimum, those that are required are o Do-it-yourself maintenance be used without affecting your war-
of the utmost importance. ranty coverage but you should always
It is your responsibility to have these be sure these are equivalent to the
maintenance procedures performed to quality of the original Hyundai parts.
comply with the terms of the warran- F010C01A-GAT Your Service Passport provides fur-
ties covering your new Hyundai. The Specified Scheduled Procedures ther information about your warranty
Service Passport supplied with your coverage.
These are the procedures such as
new vehicle provides further informa- inspections, adjustments and replace-
tion about these warranties. ments that are listed in the mainte-
nance charts starting on page 5-4.
These procedures must be performed F010D01A-AAT
at the intervals shown in the mainte- General Checks
nance schedule to assure that your
These are the regular checks you
warranty remains in effect. Although it
should perform when you drive your
is strongly recommended that they be
Hyundai or you fill the fuel tank. A list
performed by the factory-trained or
of these items will be found on page
distributor-trained technicians at your
6-7.
Hyundai dealer, these procedures may
be performed at any qualified service
facility.
 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
5
3

F010E01A-AAT F020A03S-GAT
Do-It-Yourself Maintenance SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
If you are mechanically inclined, own a REQUIREMENTS
few tools that are required and want to Inspection should be performed any
take the time to do so, you can inspect time a malfunction is experienced or
and service a number of items. For suspected. Receipts for all emission
more information about doing it your- control system services should be re-
self, see Section 6. tained to demonstrate compliance with
conditions of the emissions system
warranty.
F010F01A-GAT For severe usage maintenance require-
A Few Tips ments, see page 5-7 of this section.
Whenever you have your Hyundai ser-
viced, keep copies of the service
records in your glovebox. This will help
ensure that you can document that the
required procedures have been per-
formed to keep your warranties in ef-
fect. This is especially important when
service is not performed by an autho-
rized Hyundai dealer.
5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
4 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

F030A02A-GAT

The following maintenance services must be performed to assure good vehicle control and performance. Keep receipts for
all vehicle services to protect your warranty. Where both kilometers and time are shown, the frequency of service is
determined by whichever occurs first.

F030B05E-GAT
R :Replace I : Inspect and, after Inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace of necessary.
KILOMETERS X 1000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
NO. DESCRIPTION
MONTHS 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE (GASOLINE)
1 ENGINE OIL & FILTER R R R R R R R R
2 DRIVE BELT (WATER PUMP, ALTERNATOR & A/CON) I I I I
3 FUEL FILTER (MFI) R R
4 FUEL LINES, FUEL HOSES & CONNECTIONS I I I I I I I I
5 TIMING BELT I R
6 VAPOR HOSE & FUEL FILLER CAP I I I I
7 VACUUM CRANKCASE VENTILATION HOSES I I I I
8 AIR CLEANER FILTER I R I R I R I R
9 SPARK PLUGS See Note (1)
10 VALVE CLEARANCE (1.8/2.0 DOHC) See Note (2)

Note : (1) FOR EVERY 40,000 KM - "R"

(2) FOR EVERY 48 MONTHS OR 96,000 KM, WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST - "I"
 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
5
5

F030D01E-GAT
R :Replace I : Inspect and, after Inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary.
KILOMETERS X 1000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
NO. DESCRIPTION
MONTHS 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE (DIESEL)
1 ENGINE OIL & FILTER (API Class: CF-4 or ABOVE) See Note(1)
R R R R R R R R
(ACEA Class: B4 or ABOVE)
2 AIR CLEANER FILTER I R I R I R I R
3 FUEL FILTER CARTRIDGE European Community Only R R R R
Except European Community See Note (2)
4 TIMING BELT R
5 DRIVE BELT (FOR P/STR'G PUMP, ALTERNATOR & A/CON) I I R I
6 ALTERNATOR VACUUM PUMP I I I I I I I I
7 ALTERNATOR OIL HOSE & VACUUM HOSE I I I I I I I I
8 FUEL LINES, FUEL HOSE & CONNECTIONS I I I I I I I I

Note : (1) EVERY 500 KM OR BEFORE STARTING A LONG TRIP - "I"

(2) INSPECT EVERY 7,500KM OR 6 MONTHS AND REPLACE EVERY 15,000KM OR 12 MONTHS.
WHEN REPLACING THE FUEL FILTER CARTRIDGE, USE HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS.
5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
6

F030C04E-GAT
R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
KILOMETERS X 1000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
NO. DESCRIPTION
MONTHS 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
1 COOLING SYSTEM I I I I I I I I
2 COOLANT GASOLINE ENGINE
See Note (1)
DIESEL ENGINE
3 MANUAL TRANSAXLE OIL I I I I I I I I
4 AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE European Community Only I I I I I R I I
FLUID Except European Community I I I I I I I I
5 BRAKE HOSES AND LINES I I I I I I I I
6 BRAKE FLUID I I I I
7 REAR BRAKE DRUMS/LININGS, PARKING BRAKE I I I I
8 BRAKE PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS I I I I I I I I
9 EXHAUST PIPE AND MUFFLER I I I I I I I I
10 SUSPENSION MOUNTING BOLTS I I I I I I I I
11 STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS/LOWER ARM BALL JOINT I I I I I I I I
12 POWER STEERING PUMP, BELT AND HOSES I I I I I I I I
13 DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS I I I I
14 AIR CONDITIONING REFRIGERANT I I I I I I I I
15 AIR CONDITIONER FILTER (IN FRONT OF BLOWER UNIT) R R R R R R R R

Note :(1) FOR EVERY 24 MONTHS OR 45,000 KM, WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST - "R"
 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
5
MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS 7

F040A05E-GAT

The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer to the
chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
MAINTENANCE DRIVING
MAINTENANCE ITEM MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
OPERATION CONDITION
ENGINE OIL AND FILTER R EVERY 7,500 KM OR 6 MONTHS A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, K
AIR CLEANER FILTER R MORE FREQUENTLY C, E
SPARK PLUGS R MORE FREQUENTLY B, H
TIMING BELT R EVERY 60,000 KM OR 48 MONTHS D, E, F, G
BRAKE PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, H
REAR BRAKE DRUMS/LININGS/PADS,
I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, H
PARKING BRAKE
STEERING GEAR RACK, LINKAGE
I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, E, F, G
& BOOTS/LOWER ARM BALL JOINT
DRIVESHAFTS & BOOTS I EVERY 15,000 KM OR 12 MONTHS C, D, E, F
MANUAL TRANSAXLE OIL R EVERY 100,000 KM A, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J
AUTOMATIC European Community Only EVERY 45,000 KM
R A, C, E, F, G, H, I
TRANSAXLE FLUID Except European Community EVERY 40,000 KM
AIR CONDITIONER FILTER (IN FRONT OF BLOWER UNIT) R MORE FREQUENTLY C, E

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS

A - Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 8km(5miles) in E - Driving in sandy areas
normal temperature or less than 16km(10miles) in freezing F - Driving in heavy traffic area over 32°C (90°F).
temperature G - Driving ion uphill, downhill, or mountain road
B - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances H - Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack
C - Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or saltspread I - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle towing
roads J - Driving over 170 km/h(100 MPH)
D - Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions
very cold weather
5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
8 EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS

F060M01A-AAT F060C01A-AAT
o Engine Oil and Filter o Fuel Filter
! WARNING (Diesel only):
The engine oil and filter should be A clogged filter can limit the speed at
changed at the intervals specified in which the vehicle may be driven, dam- Never work on injection system with
the maintenance schedule. If the car age the emission system and cause engine running or within 30 sec-
is being driven in severe conditions, hard starting. If an excessive amount onds after shutting off engine. High
more frequent oil and filter changes of foreign matter accumulates in the pressure pump, rail, injectors and
are required. fuel tank, the filter may require re- high pressure pipes are subject to
placement more frequently. high pressure even after the engine
After installing a new filter, run the stopped. The fuel jet produced by
engine for several minutes, and check fuel leaks may cause serious injury,
F060B01A-AAT
for leaks at the connections. Fuel fil- if it touch the body. People using
o Drive Belts ters should be installed by trained pacemakers should not move than
Inspect all drive belts for evidence of technicians. 30cm closer to the ECU or wiring
cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil harness within the engine room
and replace if necessary. Drive belts while engine is running, since the
should be checked periodically for high currents in the Common Rail
F060D01TB-AAT
proper tension and adjusted as neces- system produce considerable mag-
o Fuel Lines, Fuel Hoses and netic fields.
sary.
Connections
Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and
connections for leakage and damage.
Replace any damaged or leaking parts
immediately.
 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
5
9

F060E01A-AAT F060F01A-AAT F060H01A-AAT

o Timing Belt o Vacuum, Crankcase Ventila- o Air Cleaner Filter
Inspect all parts related to the timing tion Hoses A Genuine Hyundai air cleaner filter is
belt for damage and deformation. Inspect the surface of hoses for evi- recommended when the filter is re-
Replace any damaged parts immedi- dence of heat and/or mechanical dam- placed.
ately. age. Hard and brittle rubber, crack-
ing, tears, cuts, abrasions, and ex-
cessive swelling indicate deteriora-
F060J01A-AAT
F060G01A-AAT tion. Particular attention should be
o Vapor Hose and Fuel Filler Cap paid to examine those hose surfaces o Spark Plugs
nearest to high heat sources, such as Make sure to install new spark plugs
The vapor hose and fuel filler cap
the exhaust manifold. of the correct heat range.
should be inspected at those inter-
Inspect the hose routing to assure that
vals specified in the maintenance
the hoses do not come in contact with
schedule. Make sure that a new va-
any heat source, sharp edges or mov- F060N02E-GAT
por hose or fuel filler cap is correctly o Valve Clearance
ing component which might cause heat
replaced.
damage or mechanical wear. Inspect Inspect excessive valve noise and/or
all hose connections, such as clamps engine vibration and adjust if neces-
and couplings, to make sure they are sary. A qualified technician should
secure, and that no leaks are present. perform the operation.
Hoses should be replaced immedi-
ately if there is any evidence of dete-
rioration or damage. F070B01A-GAT
o Cooling System
Check the cooling system part, such
as radiator, coolant reservoir, hoses
and connections for leakage and dam-
age. Replace any damaged parts.
5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
10

F070C02A-AAT F070E06A-AAT F070G02A-AAT

o Coolant o Automatic Transaxle Fluid o Brake Fluid
The coolant should be changed at The fluid level should be in the "HOT" Check brake fluid level in the brake
the intervals specified in the mainte- range of the dipstick, after the engine fluid reservoir. The level should be
nance schedule. and transaxle are at normal operating between "MIN" and "MAX" marks on
temperature. Check the automatic the side of the reservoir. Use only
transaxle fluid level with the engine hydraulic brake fluid conforming to
running and the transaxle in neutral, DOT 3 or DOT 4.
F070D01A-AAT with the parking brake properly ap-
o Manual Transaxle Oil plied. Use HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF
SP III, DIAMOND ATF SP III, SK ATF F070H01A-AAT
Inspect the manual transaxle oil ac-
SP III or other brands approved by o Rear Brake Drums/Linings,
cording to the maintenance schedule.
Hyundai Motor Co., when adding or Parking Brake
changing fluid. Using the wrong ATF
NOTE: may result in damage to the ATM. Check the rear brake drums and lin-
If the oil level is low, check for ings for scoring, burning, leaking fluid,
possible leaks before adding oil. broken parts, and excessive wear.
Do not overfill. Inspect the parking brake system in-
F070F01A-AAT
cluding the parking brake lever and
o Brake Hoses and Lines
cables. For detailed service proce-
Visually check for proper installation, dures, refer to the Shop Manual.
chafing, cracks, deterioration and any
leakage. Replace any deteriorated or
damaged parts immediately.
 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
5
11

F070J01A-AAT F070M01A-AAT F070P01A-AAT

o Brake Pads, Calipers and o Steering Gear Box, Linkage & o Driveshafts and Boots
Rotors Boots/Lower arm Ball Joint Check the drive shafts, boots and
Check the pads for excessive wear, With the vehicle stopped and engine clamps for cracks, deterioration, or
discs for run out and wear, and cali- off, check for excessive free-play in damage. Replace any damaged parts
pers for fluid leakage. the steering wheel. Check the linkage and, if necessary, repack the grease.
for bends or damage. Check the dust
boots and ball joints for deterioration,
F070K01A-AAT cracks, or damage. Replace any dam- F070Q01A-AAT
o Exhaust Pipe and Muffler aged parts. o Air Conditioning Refrigerant
Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, Check the air conditioning lines and
muffler and hangers for cracks, dete- connections for leakage and damage.
rioration, or damage. Start the engine F070N01A-AAT
Check air conditioning performance
and listen carefully for any exhaust o Power Steering Pump, according to the relevant shop manual
gas leakage. Tighten connections or Belt and Hoses if necessary.
replace parts as necessary. Check the power steering pump and
hoses for leakage and damage. Re-
place any damaged or leaking parts
F070L01A-AAT immediately. Inspect the power steer-
o Suspension Mounting Bolts ing belt for evidence of cuts, cracks,
excessive wear, oiliness and proper
Check the suspension connections for
tension. Replace or adjust it if neces-
looseness or damage. Retighten to the
sary.
specified torque.
 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

Engine Compartment ................................................... 6-2

General Checks ........................................................... 6-7
Checking the Engine Oil .............................................. 6-8
Changing the Oil and Filter .........................................6-11
Checking and Changing the Engine Coolant ..............6-14
Spark Plugs .................................................................6-17
Changing the Air Cleaner Filter ...................................6-19
Checking the Transaxle Oil (Manual) .........................6-21
Checking the Transaxle Fluid (Automatic) .................6-22

6
Checking the Brakes ..................................................6-24
Checking the Clutch Fluid ...........................................6-26
Air Conditioning Care ..................................................6-27
Changing the Air Conditioner Filter 6
(For Evaporator and Blower Unit) ............................ 6-28
Checking Drive Belts ................................................. 6-30
Checking and Replacing Fuses ................................ 6-31
Checking The Battery ................................................ 6-32
Checking The Eclectric Cooling Fans ........................6-34
Power Steering Fluid Level .........................................6-34
Removal of Water From The Fuel Filter .....................6-35
Headlight Aiming Adjustment ......................................6-36
Replacement of Light Bulbs ........................................6-38
Bulb Wattage ...............................................................6-45
Fuse Panel Description ...............................................6-46
6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
2 ENGINE COMPARTMENT

G010B01E-GAT
(1.6 DOHC)
1 2 34 5

! CAUTION:
When inspecting or servic-
ing the engine, you should
handle tools and other
heavy objects carefully so
that the plastic cover of the
engine is not damaged.

G010B01E

6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
1. Power steering fluid reservoir 6. Windshield washer fluid reservoir 10.Automatic transaxle fluid level
2. Engine oil filler cap cap dipstick (If installed)
3. Brake booster 7. Engine coolant reservoir 11.Air cleaner filter
4. Brake fluid reservoir 8. Engine oil level dipstick 12.Battery
5. Clutch fluid reservoir (If installed) 9. Radiator cap 13.Relay box
 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
6
3

G010C01E-GAT
(1.8 DOHC)
1 2 34 5

! CAUTION:
When inspecting or servic-
ing the engine, you should
handle tools and other
heavy objects carefully so
that the plastic cover of the
engine is not damaged.

G010D01E

6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
1. Power steering fluid reservoir 6. Windshield washer fluid reservoir 10.Automatic transaxle fluid level
2. Engine oil filler cap cap dipstick (If installed)
3. Brake booster 7. Engine coolant reservoir 11.Air cleaner filter
4. Brake fluid reservoir 8. Engine oil level dipstick 12.Battery
5. Clutch fluid reservoir (If installed) 9. Radiator cap 13.Relay box
6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
4

G010A01E-GAT
(2.0 DOHC)
1 2 34 5

! CAUTION:
When inspecting or servic-
ing the engine, you should
handle tools and other
heavy objects carefully so
that the plastic cover of the
engine is not damaged.

G010C02E

6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
1. Power steering fluid reservoir 6. Windshield washer fluid reservoir 10.Automatic transaxle fluid level dip-
2. Engine oil filler cap cap stick (If installed)
3. Brake booster 7. Engine coolant reservoir 11.Air cleaner filter
4. Brake fluid reservoir 8. Engine oil level dipstick 12.Battery
5. Clutch fluid reservoir (If installed) 9. Radiator cap 13.Relay box
 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
6
5

G010F01E-GAT
(2.0 DOHC CVVT)
1 2 34 5

! CAUTION:
When inspecting or servic-
ing the engine, you should
handle tools and other
heavy objects carefully so
that the plastic cover of the
engine is not damaged.

G010A02E
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
1. Power steering fluid reservoir 6. Windshield washer fluid reservoir 10.Automatic transaxle fluid level dip-
2. Engine oil filler cap cap stick (If installed)
3. Brake booster 7. Engine coolant reservoir 11.Air cleaner filter
4. Brake fluid reservoir 8. Engine oil level dipstick 12.Battery
5. Clutch fluid reservoir (If installed) 9. Radiator cap 13.Relay box
6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
6

G010E01E-GAT
(DIESEL)
1 2 34 5 6

! CAUTION:
When inspecting or servic-
ing the engine, you should
handle tools and other
heavy objects carefully so
that the plastic cover of the
engine is not damaged.

G010E01E

7 8 9 10 11 12

1. Radiator cap 5. Fuel filter 9. Engine oil level dipstick

2. Engine oil filler cap 6. Clutch fluid reservoir 10.Air cleaner filter
3. Brake booster 7. Windshield washer fluid reservoir 11.Battery
4. Brake fluid reservoir 8. Power steering fluid reservoir 12.Relay box
 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
6
GENERAL CHECKS 7

G020A02A-AAT G020B01A-AAT o Defroster, heating system opera-

Engine Compartment Vehicle Exterior tion (and air conditioning, if in-
The following should be checked regu- The following should be checked stalled)
larly: monthly: o Steering operation and condition
o Mirror condition and operation
o Engine oil level and condition o Overall appearance and condition o Turn signal operation
o Transaxle fluid level and condition o Wheel condition and wheel nut o Accelerator pedal operation
o Brake fluid level torque o Brake operation, including parking
o Clutch fluid level o Exhaust system condition brake
o Engine coolant level o Light condition and operation o Manual transaxle operation, includ-
o Windshield washer fluid level o Windshield glass condition ing clutch operation
o Accessory drive belt condition o Wiper blade condition o Automatic transaxle operation, in-
o Engine coolant hose condition o Paint condition and body corrosion cluding "PARK" mechanism opera-
o Fluid leaks o Fluid leaks tion
(on or below components) o Door and hood lock condition o Seat control condition and opera-
o Power steering fluid level o Tire pressure and condition tion
o Battery condition (including spare tire) o Seat belt condition and operation
o Air filter condition o Sunvisor operation

If you notice anything that does not

G020C01A-AAT operate correctly or appears to be
Vehicle Interior functioning incorrectly, inspect it care-
The following should be checked each fully and seek assistance from your
time when the vehicle is driven: Hyundai dealer if service is needed.

o Lights operation
o Windshield wiper operation
o Horn operation
6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
8 CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL

G030A02O-GAT
NOTE: G030B02FC-GAT
Recommended Oil o For good fuel economy, SAE 5W- Recommended Oil
Gasoline Engine 20 (5W-30), ILSAC GF-3 engine oil Diesel Engine
is preferred regardless of regional
option and engine variation.
o If SAE 5W-20, ILSAC GF-3 engine
oil is not available, secondary
recommended engine oil for cor-
responding temperature range
can be used.

G030B01JM G030B01A

Engine oil is essential to the perfor- Engine oil is essential to the perfor-
mance and service of the engine. It is mance and service of the engine. It is
suggested that you check the oil level suggested that you check the oil level
at least once a week in normal use and every 500km or before starting a long
more often if you are on a trip or driving trip and more often if you are driving
in severe conditions. in severe conditions.

The engine oil quality should meet the The engine oil quality should meet
following classification. the following classification:

API SJ, SL or ABOVE, API class: CF-4 or ABOVE

ILSAC GF-3 or ABOVE ACEA class: B4 or ABOVE
 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
6
9

NOTE: Diesel engine G030D02E-GAT

SAE 0W-30 oil is for extra cold Adding Oil

zone and to be restricted by driv- Gasoline engine
ing condition and dealing area.
(Especially, not recommended for
sustained high loaded and high
speed operation.)

G030C02JM-GAT
G030C02E
To Check the Oil Level
Gasoline engine Before checking the oil, warm up the
engine to normal operating tempera- HXDFL009

ture and be sure your vehicle is parked

on level ground. Turn the engine off. Diesel engine
Wait about five minutes, then remove
the dipstick, wipe it off, fully reinsert
the dipstick and withdraw it again.
Then note the highest level the oil has
reached on the dipstick. It should be
between the upper (F) and lower (L)
range.
G030C01E

! WARNING:
G030D01E

Be very careful not to touch the

radiator hose when checking the
engine oil as it may be hot enough
to burn you.
6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
10

If the oil level is close to or below the G350A01A-GAT o The engine oil consumption is
"L" mark, add oil until it reaches the ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION strongly effected by the viscosity
"F" mark. To add oil: Function of Engine Oil and quality of oil, engine rpm and
Engine oil has the primary function of driving condition etc. The engine
1. Remove the oil filler cap by turning lubricating and cooling the inside of oil is more consumed under severe
it counter-clockwise. the engine. driving conditions such as high
2. Add oil, then check the level again. speeds and frequent acceleration
Do not overfill. and deceleration than normal driv-
Engine oil consumption
3. Replace the cap by turning it clock- ing condition.
wise. It is normal that an engine should
consume some engine oil while nor-
The distance between the "F" and "L" mal driving. The cause of oil con-
marks is equal to about 1 liter(Gasoline sumption in a normal engine are as
Engine)/1.6 liter(Diesel Engine) of oil. follows;

o Engine oil is used to lubricate pis-

! CAUTION:
tons, piston rings and cylinders.
A thin film of oil is left on the
Slowly pour the recommended oil cylinder wall when a piston moves
into a funnel. Do not overfill not to downwards in the cylinder. High
damage engine. negative pressure generated dur-
ing engine operation sucks some
of the oil into the combustion cham-
ber.
! WARNING:
This oil with some oil of the cylin-
der wall is burned by the high tem-
Be very careful not to touch the perature combustion gases during
radiator hose when adding the en- the combustion process.
gine oil as it may be hot enough to
burn you.
 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
6
CHANGING THE OIL AND FILTER 11

G040A04FC-GAT The engine oil and filter should be

Gasoline Engine
1.6 DOHC Oil filler cap
changed at those intervals specified
in the maintenance schedule in Sec-
! WARNING:
tion 5. If the vehicle is being driven in Be very careful when draining the
severe conditions, more frequent oil engine oil as it may be hot enough
and filter changes are required. to burn you!

The procedure for changing the oil

and filter is as follows: 4. When the oil has stopped draining,
replace the drain plug using a new
1. Park the vehicle on level ground gasket and retighten by turning it
Oil filter and set the parking brake. Start the clockwise.
Drain plug engine and let it warm up until the Drain plug tightening torque:
F040A02TB
needle on the coolant temperature
kgf.m
Oil filler cap
gauge moves above the lowest
1.8/2.0 DOHC mark. Turn the engine off and place E.C 4.0 ~ 4.5
1.6 DOHC
the gear selector lever in "P" (auto- Except E.C 3.5 ~ 4.5
matic) or reverse gear (manual 1.8/2.0 DOHC 4.0 ~ 4.5
transaxle).
2. Open the hood and remove the
engine oil filler cap. 5. Remove the oil filter. You should
3. Slide underneath the car and loosen be able to unscrew the filter with
the drain plug by turning it counter- your hands. (If your hands are slip-
clockwise with a wrench of the pery, try to use a cloth between
Drain plug proper size. Be sure that a drain your hands and the filter to give
Oil filter
G040A03E pan is in position to catch the oil as yourself a better grip.) A certain
it drains out, then remove the drain amount of oil will come out when
plug. you remove the filter, so be sure to
have your drain pan in place un-
derneath it.
6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
12

6. Install a new oil filter in accordance 10.Shut off the engine and recheck G040B03FC-GAT

with the instructions on the carton the oil level. Diesel Engine
or on the filter itself. Do not over-
tighten. NOTE: Oil filler cap
Always dispose of used engine oil
Oil filter tightening torque: in an environmentally acceptable
1.2~1.6kgf.m manner. It is suggested that it be
placed in a sealed container and
Be sure that the mounting surface taken to a service station for maybe
on the engine is clean and that the reclaimation. Do not pour the oil
old gasket is removed completely. on the ground or put it in with the
Lubricate the new gasket on the household trash. Engine oil
filter with clean engine oil before drain plug KCHB01A
installation.
7. Remove the engine oil level dip- ! WARNING:
The engine oil and filter should be
changed at those intervals specified
stick.
8. Refill the crankcase with the rec- Used motor oil may cause irrita- in the maintenance schedule in Sec-
ommended engine oil. Refer to tion or cancer of the skin if left in tion 5. If the car is being driven in
the specification in chapter 9 for contact with the skin for prolonged severe conditions, more frequent oil
engine oil capacity. periods of time. Wash your hands and filter changes are required.
thoroughly with soap and warm
water as soon as possible after The procedure for changing the oil
! CAUTION: handling used oil. and filter is as follows:
Slowly pour the recommended oil
into a funnel. Do not overfill not to 1. Park the car on level ground and
damage the engine. set the parking brake. Start the
engine and let it warm up until the
9. Start the engine and check to be needle on the coolant temperature
sure no oil is leaking from the gauge moves above the lowest
drain plug or oil filter. mark.
 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
6
13

Turn the engine off and place the 8. Install a new copper washer of the
gear selector lever in "P" (auto- oil filter drain plug by the side of
matic) or reverse gear (manual lower case and retighten by turn-
transaxle). Upper cap ing it clockwise.
2. Open the hood and remove the O-ring
engine oil filler cap. Tightening torque : 0.8~1.0 kgf.m
Oil filter
3. Slide underneath the car and loosen element
the drain plug by turning it counter- Washer
9. After mounting a new oil filter ele-
clockwise with a wrench of the Oil filter ment and O-ring to upper cap,
proper size. Be sure that a drain Lower install the upper cap to lower case
drain plug
pan is in position to catch the oil as case and retighten by turning it clock-
G040B01FC
it drains out, then remove the drain wise. Do not over-tighten.
plug. 5. Loosen the oil filter drain plug by
turning it counterclockwise with a Tightening torque : 2.3~2.5 kgf.m
wrench of the proper size and drain
! WARNING: out some oil in the oil filter. Be sure NOTE:
Be very careful when draining the that a drain pan is in position to Be careful not to be the element
engine oil as it may be hot enough catch the oil. upside down when mounting the
to burn you! 6. Loosen the oil filter upper cap with element.
a proper tool from the lower case
until an O-ring is seen. Then, drain 10.Remove the engine oil level dip-
4. When the oil has stopped draining, the oil completely. stick.
replace the drain plug using a new 7. Pull out the oil filter upper cap with 11.Refill the crankcase with the rec-
gasket and retighten by turning it element from the lower case. ommended engine oil. Refer to
clockwise. Using a clean cloth, remove any the specification in chapter 9 for
dirt or oil accumulated around the engine oil capacity.
Drain plug tightening torque: lower case.
3.5 ~ 4.5 kgf.m
6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
14 CHECKING AND CHANGING
THE ENGINE COOLANT
G050A01A-AAT

! CAUTION: ! WARNING: !
Slowly pour the recommended oil Used motor oil may cause irrita- WARNING:
into a funnel. Do not overfill not to tion or cancer of the skin if left in Do not remove the radiator cap
damage the engine. contact with the skin for prolonged when the engine is hot. When the
periods of time. Wash your hands engine is hot, the engine coolant
12.Start the engine and check to be thoroughly with soap and warm is under pressure and may erupt
sure no oil is leaking from the water as soon as possible after through the opening if the cap is
drain plug or oil filter. handling used oil. removed. You could be seriously
13.Shut off the engine and recheck burned if you do not observe this
the oil level. precaution. Do not remove the
radiator cap until the radiator is
cool to the touch.
NOTE:
o It is recommended that the en-
gine oil and filter should be
changed by an authorized G050B01A-AAT
Hyundai dealer. Recommended Engine Coolant
o Always dispose of used engine Gasoline engine
oil in an environmentally accept-
able manner. It is suggested that
it be placed in a sealed con-
tainer and taken to a service
station for maybe reclaimation.
Do not pour the oil on the
ground or put it in with the
household trash.

G050B01E
 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
6
15

Diesel engine Ambient Engine coolant concentration Diesel engine

temperature Antifreeze
solution Water
°C ( °F)
-15 (5) 35% 65%
-25 (-13) 40% 60%
-35 (-31) 50% 50%
-45 (-49) 60% 40%

G050C01A-GAT
G050C02E G050D02E
To Check the Coolant Level
Use a high quality ethylene-glycol The coolant level can be seen on the
Gasoline engine
coolant in a 50/50 mix with water. The side of the plastic coolant reservoir.
engine coolant should be compatible The level of the coolant should be
with aluminum engine parts. Addi- between the "L" and "F" lines on the
tional corrosion inhibitors or additives reservoir when the engine is cold. If
should not be used. The cooling sys- the level is below the "L" mark, add
tem must be maintained with the cor- engine coolant to bring it up between
rect concentration and type of engine "L" and "F". If the level is low, inspect
coolant to prevent freezing and corro- for coolant leaks and recheck the
sion. Never allow the concentration of fluid level frequently. If the level drops
antifreeze to exceed the 60% level or again, visit your Hyundai dealer for an
go below the 35% level, or damage to G050D01E inspection and diagnosis of the rea-
the cooling system may result. For son.
proper concentration when adding or
replacing the engine coolant, refer to
the following table.
6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
16

G050D03A-AAT
To Change the Coolant
The coolant should be changed at
those intervals specified in the ve-
hicle maintenance schedule in Sec-
tion 5.

! CAUTION:
Engine coolant can damage the
finish of your car. If you spill en- G050D03E G050D04E
gine coolant on the car, wash it off 5. Start the engine, top off the radiator
thoroughly with clean water. 4. Turn the radiator cap counterclock-
wise without pressing down on it, with water and then add engine
until it stops. This relieves any pres- coolant to the reservoir until the
1. Park the car on level ground, set the sure remaining in the cooling sys- level is between "L" and "F".
parking brake and remove the radia- tem. And remove the radiator cap 6. Replace the radiator and reservoir
tor cap when cool. by pushing down and turning coun- caps and check to be sure the drain
2. Be sure your drain receptacle is in terclockwise. cocks are fully closed and not leak-
place. Open the drain cock on the Fill the radiator with clean deminer- ing.
radiator. Allow all the engine cool- alized or distilled water. Continue
ant to drain from the cooling sys- to add clean demineralized or dis-
tem, then securely close the drain tilled water in small quantities until
cock. the fluid level stays up in the radia-
3. Check Section 9 for the capacity of tor neck.
the cooling system in your car.
Then, following the manufacturer's
directions on the engine coolant ! WARNING:
container, add the appropriate Remove the radiator cap when the
quantity of coolant to the radiator. radiator is cool.
 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
6
SPARK PLUGS 17

G060B02S-GAT
NOTE:
REPLACING THE SPARK
! WARNING: PLUGS (Gasoline Engine)
When replacing the spark plugs,
genuine Hyundai replacement parts
The cooling fan is controlled by

Unleaded: 1.0 ~ 1.1 mm (0.039 ~ 0.043 in.)

are recommended.

Leaded: 0.7 ~ 0.8 mm (0.028 ~ 0.032 in.)

engine coolant temperature and may
sometimes operate even when the Recommended Spark Plugs:
engine is not running. Use extreme
caution when working near the Unleaded Leaded
blades of the cooling fan so that engine engine
you are not injured by a rotating fan CHAMPION RC10YC4 RC10YC
blade. As the engine coolant tem-
perature decreases, the fan will au- NGK BKR5ES-11 BKR5ES
tomatically shut off. This is a nor-
mal condition.
G060A01L

The spark plugs should be changed

at the intervals specified in the ve-
hicle maintenances schedule in Sec-
tion 5 or whenever engine perfor-
mance indicates they should be
changed. Symptoms that suggest poor
spark plug performance include en-
gine misfiring under load, loss of fuel
economy, poor acceleration, etc.
When spark plugs are replaced, al-
ways use spark plugs recommended
by Hyundai. The use of other spark
plugs can result in loss of perfor-
mance, radio interference or engine
damage.
6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
18

G060C01S-GAT 3. To remove the spark plug cable, 4. When preparing to remove the old
Changing the Spark Plugs pull straight up on the insulated spark plug, guide the socket down
connector, not the cable. Pulling over the spark plug, being careful
on the cable may damage the car- not to damage the ceramic insula-
bon core conductor. tor.
5. To remove the spark plug, turn the
wrench handle in a counterclock-
wise direction.
6. To install the new spark plug, guide
the socket down over the spark
plug, being careful not to damage
the ceramic insulator.
HGK256

You will find it easier to change spark

plugs if the engine is cold. Always
change one spark plug at a time. This HGK257
helps avoid getting the wires mixed
up.
! WARNING:
1. Remove the center cover on the
engine rocker cover. It is recommended that the engine
2. Using a clean cloth, remove any be cool or cold when changing the
dirt that has accumulated around spark plugs. If the engine is hot, HGK258
the spark plug so it cannot fall into you could burn yourself on the
the cylinder when the spark plug is insulated connector, the spark
removed. plugs or the engine itself.
 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
6
CHANGING THE AIR 19
CLEANER FILTER
NOTE: G070A01E-AAT To change the filter, unsnap the clips
Spark plugs should be tightened Gasoline engine around the cover. When this is done,
firmly. Over-tightening can dam- the cover can be lifted off, the old
age the threads in the aluminum filter removed and the new filter put in
cylinder head. Leaving them too its place. Genuine Hyundai Replace-
loose can cause the spark plugs to ment Parts are recommended.
get very hot and possibly result in
damage to the engine.
! CAUTION:
7. Replace the cable by pushing the o Operating your vehicle without
insulated connector directly down a proper air filter in place can
onto the electrode. Check to be HXDFL011-M result in excessive engine wear.
sure it has snapped into place and o When removing the air cleaner
can't fall off. filter, be careful that dust or dirt
Diesel engine
does not enter the air intake.
These may result in damage to
the air cleaner filter.

G070A02E
6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
20 WINDSHIELD WIPER FILLING THE WASHER
BLADES RESERVOIR
G080A02A-AAT G090A02A-GAT

! CAUTION:
Gasoline engine
o Do not operate the wipers on
dry glass. This can result in more
rapid wear of the wiper blades
and may scratch the glass.
o Keep the blade rubber out of
contact with petroleum products
such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.

HEF119 G090A01E

The wiper blades should be carefully

inspected from time to time and Diesel engine
cleaned to remove accumulations of
road film or other debris. To clean the
wiper blades and arms, use a clean
sponge or cloth with a mild soap or
detergent and water. If the wipers
continue to streak or smear the glass,
replace them with genuine Hyundai
replacement parts or their equivalent.

G090A02E

The washer fluid reservoir supplies

fluid to the windshield washer sys-
tem.
 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
6
CHECKING THE TRANSAXLE OIL 21

A good quality washer fluid should be G100A04A-GAT

MANUAL TRANSAXLE
used to fill the washer reservoir. The
fluid level should be checked more
! WARNING:
frequently during inclement weather o Windshield washer fluid agents
or whenever the washer system is in contain some amounts of alcohol
more frequent use. and can be flammable under cer-
The capacity of the washer reservoir tain circumstances. Do not allow
is 3.0 liters (3.2 U.S. quarts). sparks of flame to contact the
washer fluid or the washer fluid
reservoir. Damage to the vehicle
! CAUTION:
or its occupants could occur.
o Windshield washer fluid is poi- Filler plug Drain plug
o Radiator antifreeze (engine cool- sonous to humans and animals.
G100A01A
ant) should not be used in the Do not drink windshield washer
washer system because it will fluid. Serious injury or death Transaxle lubricant in the manual
damage the car's finish. could occur. transaxle should be checked at those
o The washer should not be oper- intervals specified in the vehicle main-
ated if the washer reservoir is tenance schedule in Section 5.
empty. This can damage the
washer fluid pump. Recommended Oil
Use only HYUNDAI GENUINE
PARTS MTF 75W/85 (API GL-4) in
the manual transaxle.

Manual Transaxle Oil Capacity

The oil capacity of the manual
transaxle is 2.15 liters (2.27 U.S.
quarts).
6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
22

1. Using a wrench of the correct size, NOTE:

! WARNING:
loosen the oil filler plug by turning
it counterclockwise and remove it
Automatic transaxle fluid is a red in
color. As driving distance increases,
It is always better to check the with your fingers. the fluid color turns darkish red
transaxle oil level when the engine 2. Use your finger or suitable tool to gradually. It is a normal condition
is cool or cold. If the engine is hot, feel inside the hole. The oil level and you should not judge the need
you should exercise great caution should be at its bottom edge. If it is to replace based upon the changing
to avoid burning yourself on hot not, check for leaks before adding color.
engine or exhaust parts. oil. To refill the transaxle or bring You must replace the automatic
the oil level up,add oil slowly until it transaxle fluid in accordance with
reaches the proper level. Do not intervals specified in the vehicle
G100B02A-AAT overfill. maintenance schedule in section
To Check the Maunal Transaxle 3. Replace the plug and washer, 5.
Fluid Level screw it in with your fingers and
then tighten securely with the
wrench.
G110B04A-AAT
Recommended Fluid
Your Hyundai automatic transaxle is
G110A02E-AAT
specially designed to operate with
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III, DIA-
Transaxle fluid in the automatic MOND ATF SP-III, SK ATF SP III or
transaxle should be checked at those other brands approved by Hundai
intervals specified in the vehicle main- Motor Co,. Damage caused by a
tenance schedule in Section 5. nonspecified fluid is not covered by
G100B01L
your new vehicle limited warranty.
Park the car on level ground with the
engine off.
 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
6
23

G110D03E-GAT
To Check the Transaxle Fluid
! CAUTION: Level
Use of aftermarket ATF additives
may cause damage to the auto-
matic transaxle. Only use HYUNDAI
GENUINE ATF SP III, DIAMOND
ATF SP III, SK ATF SP III or other
brands approved by Hyundai Mo-
tor Co., If you are having your
vehicle serviced at a facility other
than a Hyundai dealer, verify that G110D01E
the correct ATF is used for your While the engine is idling, apply the
vehicle. brakes and move the gear selector
C090A02E
lever from "P" to each of its other
G110C01E-GAT Park the car on level ground with the positions -- "R", "N", "D", "3" (1.8/2.0
Transaxle Fluid Capacity parking brake engaged. When the DOHC), "2", "L" -- and then return to
transaxle fluid level is checked, the "N" or "P". With the engine still idling:
The fluid capacity of the automatic
transaxle fluid should be at normal
transaxle is 6.1 liters (1.6 DOHC)/7.8
operating temperature and the en- 1. Open the hood, being careful to
liters (1.8/2.0 DOHC). gine idling. keep hands, long hair and clothing
clear of any moving parts.
! WARNING:
2. Remove the transaxle dipstick, wipe
it clean, reinsert the dipstick as far
The transaxle fluid level should be as it will go, then remove it again.
checked when the engine is at Now check the fluid level on the
normal operating temperature. This dipstick. It should be in the "HOT"
means that the engine, radiator, range on the dipstick.
exhaust system etc., are very hot.
Exercise great care not to burn
yourself during this procedure.
6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
24 CHECKING THE BRAKES

G120A01A-AAT

! WARNING (Diesel only): !

Fluid level should be within this range Never work on injection system CAUTION:
with engine running or within 30 Because brakes are essential to
seconds after shutting off engine. the safe operation of the car, it is
High pressure pump, rail, injec- suggested that they be checked
tors and high pressure pipes are and inspected by your Hyundai
subject to high pressure even af- dealer. The brakes should be
ter the engine stopped. The fuel jet checked and inspected for wear at
produced by fuel leaks may cause those intervals specified in the
HKSOM120
serious injury, if it touch the body. vehicle maintenance schedule in
3. If the transaxle fluid level is low, People using pacemakers should Section 5.
use a funnel to add transaxle fluid not move than 30cm closer to the
through the dipstick tube until the ECU or wiring harness within the
level reaches the "HOT" range. Do engine room while engine is run-
not overfill. ning, since the high currents in
the Common Rail system produce
! WARNING:
considerable magnetic fields.

The cooling fan is controlled by

engine coolant temperature and
may sometimes operate even when
the engine is not running. Use
extreme caution when working
near the blades of the cooling fan
so that you are not injured by a
rotating fan blade. As the engine
coolant temperature decreases, the
fan will automatically shut off. This
is a normal condition.
 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
6
25

G120B01A-AAT G120D01A-AAT G120E02A-AAT

Checking the Brake Fluid Level To Check the Fluid Level Adding Brake Fluid

! WARNING:
! WARNING:
Use caution when handling brake Handle brake fluid carefully. It can
fluid. It can damage your vision if damage your vision if it gets into
it gets into your eyes. It will also your eyes. Use only DOT 3 or DOT
damage your vehicle's paint if 4 specification fluid from a sealed
spilled on it and not removed im- container. Do not allow the fluid
mediately. can or reservoir to remain open
any longer than required. This will
prevent entry of dirt and moisture
HXDFL012 which can damage the brake sys-
G120C02A-AAT The fluid level in the brake fluid reser- tem and cause improper opera-
Recommended Brake Fluid voir should be checked periodically. tion.
The level should be between the "MIN"
Use only hydraulic brake fluid con- To add brake fluid, first wipe away
and "MAX" marks on the side of the
forming to DOT 3 or DOT 4 specifica- any dirt then unscrew the fluid reser-
reservoir. If the level is at or below
tions in your braking system. Follow voir cap. Slowly pour the recom-
the "MIN" mark, carefully add fluid to
the instructions printed on the con- mended fluid into the reservoir. Do
bring it up to "MAX". Do not overfill.
tainer. not overfill. Carefully replace the cap
on the reservoir and tighten.
6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
26 CHECKING THE CLUTCH FLUID

G130A01S-AAT The clutch fluid level in the master G130B02A-AAT

To Check the Clutch Fluid cylinder should be checked when To Replace the Fluid
(Manual Transaxle) performing other under hood services. Recommended brake fluid conform-
Gasoline engine The system should be checked for ing to DOT 3 or DOT 4 specification
leakage at the same time. Check to should be used. The reservoir cap
make certain that the clutch fluid level must be fully tightened to avoid con-
is always between the "MAX" and tamination from foreign matter or
"MIN" level markings on the fluid res- moisture.
ervoir. Fill as required. Fluid loss indi-
cates a leak in the clutch system NOTE:
which should be inspected and re- Do not allow any other liquids to
paired immediately. Consult your contaminate the brake fluid. Seal
Hyundai dealer. damage will result.
HXDFL013

Diesel engine
! WARNING:
Use caution when handling brake
fluid. It can damage your vision if
you get it in your eyes. It will also
damage your vehicle's paint if
spilled on it and not removed im-
mediately.

G130A02E
 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
6
AIR CONDITIONING CARE 27

G140A01A-AAT G140D01S-GAT
Keeping the Condenser Clean Checking the Compressor Drive
! CAUTION: Belt
The air conditioning condenser (and
Running the air conditioning sys-
engine radiator) should be checked
tem for extended periods of time A/C 8mm
periodically for accumulation of dirt,
with a low refrigerant level may (0.315 in.)
dead insects, leaves, etc. These can
damage the compressor.
interfere with maximum cooling effi-
ciency. When removing such accu-
mulations, brush or hose them away
carefully to avoid bending the cooling
fans. G140C01A-AAT
Lubrication
To lubricate the compressor and the TENSION PULLEY
G140D01A
seals in the system, the air condition- CRANK PULLEY
G140B01A-AAT
ing should be run for at least 10
Checking the Air Conditioning minutes each week. This is particu-
When the air conditioning is being
Operation used regularly, the compressor drive
larly important during cool weather
belt tension should be checked at
1. Start the engine and let it run at a when the air conditioning system is
least once a month.
fast idle for several minutes with not otherwise in use.
To check the drive belt tension, press
the air conditioning set at the maxi- down on the belt halfway between the
mum cold setting. engine crankshaft and compressor
2. If the air coming out of the in-dash pulleys. Pressing with your finger, you
vents is not cold, have the air con- should not be able to deflect this belt
ditioning system inspected by your anymore than 8.0 mm. If you have
Hyundai dealer. the instruments to check it with a
force of 98N (22 lb.), the deflection
should be approx. 8.0 mm (0.315 in.).
If the belt is too loose, have it ad-
justed by your Hyundai dealer.
6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
28 CHANGING THE AIR CONDITIONER FILTER

B140E01E-AAT
(For Evaporator and Blower Unit)
(If installed)
The air conditioner filter is located in
front of the evaporator unit behind the
glove box.
It helps to decrease pollutants from
entering the car.

HXD2097 HXD2099

2. Remove the mounting bolts with 4. Replace the air conditioner filter
the spanner, and then detach the with a new one.
mounting bracket. 5. Installation is the reverse order of
disassembly.

! CAUTION:
HXD2096 Be sure to install the air condi-
tioner filter in the direction of the
1. Open the glove box and remove
arrow sign. Otherwise, it may cause
the adjusting pins on both sides of
noise or deterioration.
the glove box.

HXD2098

3. Remove the filter cover by pushing

the two hooks of the filter cover.
 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
6
CHECKING THE FREEPLAY 29

G150A01A-GAT G160A01A-GAT G170A01A-GAT

Steering wheel Clutch pedal Brake pedal

6 ~ 13 mm 3 ~ 8 mm
(0.24 ~ 0.51 in.) (0.12 ~ 0.31 in.)

30 mm
(1.18 in.)

G150A02E
G160A01E HXGS508

To check the steering wheel freeplay, With the engine off, press lightly on With the engine off, press down on
stop the car with the wheels pointed the clutch pedal until you feel a change the brake pedal several times to re-
straight ahead and gently move the in resistance. This is the clutch pedal duce the vacuum in the brake booster.
steering wheel back and forth. Use freeplay. The freeplay should be within Then, using your hand, press down
very light finger pressure and be sen- the limits specified in the illustration. slowly on the brake pedal until you
sitive to changes in resistance that If it is not, have it inspected by your feel a change in resistance. This is
mark the limits of the freeplay. If the Hyundai dealer and adjusted or re- the brake pedal freeplay. The freeplay
freeplay is greater than specified, have paired if necessary. should be within the limits specified in
it inspected by your Hyundai dealer the illustration. If it is not, have it
and adjusted or repaired if neces- inspected by your Hyundai dealer and
sary. adjusted or repaired if necessary.
6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
30 CHECKING DRIVE BELTS

G180A01A-GAT 190A01A-GAT G190B01TB-GAT

CHECKING BRAKE PEDAL Gasoline Engine Diesel Engine
CLEARANCE Water Pump Pulley Alternator
5.1~6 mm
(0.2~0.24 in.) Auto tentioner fully

Power
45.1 mm steering
(1.78 in.) Alternator pump
Pulley
A/C comp.
Crankshaft Pulley HTB186 G190B01A

G180A01L Drive belts should be checked peri- At the scheduled maintenance inspec-
You need a helper to check the brake odically for proper tension and ad- tion, belts should be examined for
pedal clearance. With the engine run- justed if necessary. At the same time, cracks, wear, fraying or other evi-
ning, have your helper press down on belts should be examined for cracks, dence of deterioration and replaced if
the brake pedal several times and wear, fraying or other evidence of necessary.
then hold it down with a force of about deterioration and replaced if neces- Belt routing should also be checked
490N (50 kg, 110 lbs). The brake sary. to be sure there is no interference
pedal clearance is the distance from Belt routing should also be checked between the belts and other parts of
the top surface of the brake pedal to to be sure there is no interference the engine.
the asphalt sheeting under the floor between the belts and other parts of
mat. If the brake pedal clearance is the engine. After a belt is replaced,
not within the limits specified in the the new belt should be adjusted again
illustration, have it inspected by your after two or three weeks to eliminate
Hyundai dealer and adjusted or re- slack resulting from initial stretching
paired if necessary. after use.
 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
6
CHECKING AND REPLACING FUSES 31

G200A01A-AAT The fuse box for the lights and other

Replacing a Fusible Link
! CAUTION:
electrical accessories will be found in
the backside of multi box located in
When replacing a fusible link, never the left side of the driver. On the
use anything but a new fusible backside of the multi box, you will find
link with the same or lower amper- a list showing the circuits protected
age rating. Never use a piece of by each fuse.
Bad Good wire or a higher-rated fusible link. If any of your car's lights or other
This could result in serious dam- electrical accessories stop working, a
age and create a fire hazard. blown fuse could be the reason. If the
fuse has burned out, you will see that
the metal strip inside the fuse has
burned through. If you suspect a blown
G200A01E
fuse, follow this procedure:
G200B01E-AAT
A fusible link will melt if the electrical
circuits from the battery are ever over- Replacing Accessory Fuses
1. Turn off the ignition and all other
loaded, thus preventing damage to switches.
the entire wiring harness. (This could 2. Open the fuse box and examine
be caused by a short in the system each fuse. Remove each fuse by
drawing too much current.) If this pulling it toward you (a small "fuse
ever happens, have a Hyundai dealer puller" tool is contained in the fuse
determine the cause, repair the sys- box to simplify this operation).
tem and replace the fusible link. The 3. Be sure to check all other fuses
fusible links are located in a fuse box even if you find one that appears to
for easy inspection. have burned out.

HXDFL200
6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
32 CHECKING THE BATTERY

G210A01A-AAT

Good Burned out

HXDFL1026-1 G200B02L
D010B02E
4. Replace the blown fuse by press-
ing a new fuse of the same rating ! CAUTION:
into place. The fuse should be a
snug fit. If it is not, have the fuse A burned-out fuse indicates that ! WARNING:
clip repaired or replaced by a there is a problem in the electrical Batteries can be dangerous!
Hyundai dealer. If you do not have circuit. If you replace a fuse and it When working with batteries, care-
a spare fuse, you may be able to blows as soon as the accessory is fully observe the following pre-
borrow a fuse of the same or lower turned on, the problem is serious cautions to avoid serious injuries.
rating from an accessory you can and should be referred to a
temporarily get along without (the Hyundai dealer for diagnosis and
repair. Never replace a fuse with The fluid in the battery contains a
radio or cigarette lighter, for ex-
anything except a fuse with the strong solution of sulfuric acid, which
ample). Always remember to re-
same or a lower amperage rating. is poisonous and highly corrosive. Be
place the borrowed fuse.
A higher capacity fuse could cause careful not to spill it on yourself or the
damage and create a fire hazard. car. If you do spill battery fluid on
yourself, immediately do the follow-
NOTE: ing:
See page 6-46 for the fuse panel
descriptions.
 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
6
33

o If battery fluid is on your skin, flush G210B01Y-GET

Checking the Battery Keep batteries out of the
the affected areas with water for at
least 15 minutes and then seek reach of children because
Keep the battery clean. Any evidence batteries contain highly cor-
medical assistance. of corrosion around the battery posts rosive SULFURIC ACID. Do
o If battery fluid is in your eyes, rinse or terminals should be removed using not allow battery acid to
out your eyes with water and get a solution of household baking soda contact your skin, eyes,
medical assistance as soon as and warm water. After the battery ter- clothing or paint finish.
possible. While you are being driven minals are dry, cover them with a light
to get medical assistance, continue If any electrolyte gets into
coating of grease. your eyes, flush your eyes
to rinse your eyes by using a
sponge or soft cloth saturated with with clean water for at least
water. ! WARNING:
15 minutes and get imme-
diate medical attention. If
o If you swallow battery fluid, drink a
Always read the following possible, continue to apply
large quantity of water or milk fol-
instructions carefully when water with a sponge or
lowed by milk of magnesia, eat a
handling a battery. cloth until medical atten-
raw egg or drink vegetable oil. Get
Keep lighted cigarettes and tion is received.
medical assistance as soon as pos-
all other flames or sparks If electrolyte gets on your
sible.
away from the battery. skin, thoroughly wash the
Hydrogen, which is a highly contacted area.
While batteries are being charged
combustible gas, is always If you feel a pain or a burn-
(either by a battery charger or by the
present in battery cells and ing sensation, get medical
vehicle's generator), they produce
may explode if ignited. attention immediately.
explosive gases. Always observe
these warnings to prevent injuries from Wear eye protection when
occurring: charging or working near a
battery.
Always provide ventilation
o Charge batteries only in a well ven-
when working in an en-
tilated area.
closed space.
o Do not permit flames, sparks or
smoking in the area.
o Keep children away from the area.
6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
34 CHECKING ELECTRIC POWER STEERING FLUID
COOLING FANS LEVEL
G220A01A-AAT G230A03A-GAT
o When lifting a plastic-cased bat- Gasoline engine
tery, excessive pressure on the
case may cause battery acid to
! WARNING:
leak, resulting in personal injury. The cooling fan is controlled by
Lift with a battery carrier or with engine coolant temperature and
your hands on opposite corners. may sometimes operate even when
o Never attempt to charge the bat- the engine is not running. Use
tery when the battery cables are extreme caution when working
connected. near the blades of the cooling fan,
o The electrical ignition system so that you are not injured by a
works with high voltage. rotating fan blade. As the engine
Never touch these components coolant temperature decreases the G230A01E

with the engine running or the fan will automatically shut off. This
ignition switched on. is a normal condition. Diesel engine

G220B01A-AAT
Checking Engine Cooling Fan
The engine cooling fan should come
on automatically if the engine coolant
temperature is high.

G230A02E
G220C01A-AAT
Checking Condenser Cooling Fan The power steering fluid level should
be checked regularly.
The condenser cooling fan should
come on automatically whenever the
air conditioning is in operation.
 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
6
REMOVAL OF WATER FROM 35
THE FUEL FILTER
To check the power steering fluid level, G240A01A-AAT G300A02B-GAT

be sure the ignition is "OFF", then POWER STEERING HOSES (Diesel Engine)
check to make certain that the power It is suggested that you check the
steering fluid level is between the power steering hose connections for
"MAX" and "MIN" level markings on fluid leakage at regular intervals. The
the fluid reservoir. power steering hoses should be re-
placed if there is severe surface crack-
NOTE: ing, scuffing or worn spots. Deteriora-
Grinding noise from the power tion of the hose could cause prema-
steering pump may be heard im- ture failure.
mediately after the engine is started
in extremely cold conditions (be-
low - 20°C). In this case, if the G300A01E
noise stops during warm up, there
is no abnormal function in the sys- If the fuel filter warning lamp illumi-
tem. This is due to a power steer- nates during driving, it indicates that
ing fluid characteristic in extremely water has accumulated in the fuel
cold conditions. filter. If this occurs, remove the water
as described.
Recommended Fluid:
Use PSF-3 type fluid

NOTE:
Do not start the engine when the
power steering oil reservoir is
empty.
6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
36 HEADLIGHT AIMING
ADJUSTMENT
G290A02E-GAT

! WARNING:
Before performing aiming adjustment,
make sure of the following.
Be sure to carefully wipe away any
water drained out in this manner, 1. Keep all tires inflated to the correct
because the fuel mixed in the wa- pressure.
ter might be ignited and result in a 2. Place the vehicle on level ground
fire. and press the front bumper and
rear bumper down several times.
(Place the vehicle at a distance of
G300B01A
3,000 mm (118 in.) from the test
wall.)
1. Loosen the drain plug at the bottom 3. See that the vehicle is unloaded
of the fuel filter. (except for full levels of coolant,
2. Tighten the drain plug when water engine oil and fuel, and spare tire,
no longer comes out. jack, and tools). Have the driver or
3. Check to be sure that the warning equivalent weight placed in driver's
lamp illuminates when the ignition seat.
key is turned to "ON", and that it 4. Clean the head lights lenses and
goes off when the engine is started. turn on the headlights (low beam).
If in doubt, consult your nearest
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

NOTE:
It is recommended that water ac-
cumulated in the fuel filter should
be removed by an authorized
Hyundai dealer.
 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
6
37

G290B03E-GAT be checked using an aiming screen as

Horizontal Adjustment After Headlight shown in the illustration. Turn on the
Aiming Assembly Replacement headlight switch. (Low Beam Position)
Vertical
Aiming LHD 1. Adjust headlights so that main axis
30mm (1.18 in.) Vertical line
Horizontal line W
of light is parallel to the center line
of the body and is aligned with point
"P" "P" shown in the illustration.
2. Dotted lines in the illustration show
H
Cut-off line the center of the the headlights.
Specifications:
G290A02E L Ground
line "H":
5. Open the hood. H Horizontal center line of headlights
6. Draw the vertical line (through the
from ground.
center of each headlight beam pat- G290B01L
Low beam : 639 mm (25.2 in.)
tern) and the horizontal line (through RHD 30mm (1.18 in.) Vertical line High beam : 619 mm (23.3 in.)
the center of each headlight beam
pattern) on the aiming screen. Horizontal line W "W":
And then, draw a horizontal paral- "P" Distance between each headlight
lel line at 30 mm (1.18 in.) under center.
the horizontal line. H Low beam : 1124 mm (44.2 in.)
Cut-off line
7. Adjust each cut-off line of the low High beam : 840 mm (33.0 in.)
beam to the parallel line with a "L":
phillips screwdriver - VERTICAL L Ground
line Distance between the headlights and
AIMING. H the wall that the lights are tested
8. Adjust each cut-off line of the low against.
beam to the each vertical line with G290B01L-D
: 3,000 mm (118 in.).
a phillips screwdriver - HORIZON- If the vehicle has had front body repair
TAL AIMING. and the headlight assembly has been
replaced, the headlight aiming should
6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
38 REPLACEMENT OF LIGHT
BULBS
G260A03A-AAT G270A01E-GAT

Before attempting to replace a head- HEADLIGHT AND FRONT TURN

light bulb, be sure the switch is turned SIGNAL LIGHT
to the "OFF" position. High beam Low beam
The next paragraph shows how to
reach the headlight bulbs so they
may be changed. Be sure to replace
the burned-out bulb with one of the
same number and wattage rating.
See page 6-45 for the wattage de-
scriptions. Turn signal light HXDFL1022

4. Using a spanner of the correct

! CAUTION: G270A01E
size, remove the headlight assem-
bly mounting bolts.
Keep the lamps out of contact with Replacement instructions:
petroleum products, such as oil,
gasoline, etc. 1. Allow the bulb to cool. Wear eye
protection.
2. Open the engine hood.
3. Always grasp the bulb by its plastic
base, avoid touching the glass.

HXDFL1009

5. Disconnect the power cord from

the back of the headlight.
 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
6
39

(3)

(2)
(1)

HXDFL1010 HXDFL1013-1 G270A03O

6. Turn the plastic cover counterclock- 8. Remove the protective cap from
wise and remove it. the replacement bulb and install
the new bulb by matching the plas- ! WARNING:
tic base with the headlight hole. This halogen bulb contains gas
Retighten the bulb spring and re- under pressure and if impacted
connect the power cord. could shatter, resulting in flying
9. Use the protective cap and carton fragments. Always wear eye pro-
to promptly dispose of the old bulb. tection when servicing the bulb.
10.Check for proper headlight aim. Protect the bulb against abrasions
or scratches and against liquids
(1) High beam when lighted. Turn the bulb on
(2) Low beam only when installing in a head-
(3) Front turn signal light light. Replace the headlight if dam-
HXDFL1011 aged or cracked. Keep the bulb
out of the reach of children and
7. Push the bulb spring to remove the dispose of the used bulb with care.
headlight bulb.
6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
40

G270D01E-GAT European Community Only

REAR COMBINATION LIGHT
(Rear Fog Light, Stop / Tail Light,
Back up light and Rear Turn Sig- (4)
nal Light)
4Door (2)
1. Open the trunk lid.
(3)

HXDFL1015
(1)
G270D01E
3. Remove the mounting screws of
the rear combination light with a 4. To replace the rear combination
spanner. light, remove it from the bulb holder
and install the new bulb.
Except European Community
(1) Stop/Tail light
(2) Rear turn signal light
HXDFL1014
(3) Back up light
2. Unscrew and remove the cover on (1) (4) Rear Fog Light
the inside of the rear luggage trim.

(2)

(3)
HXDFL1016
 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
6
41

5Door(Luggage compartment) 5Door (Tail gate)

1. Open the tail gate. 1. Open the tail gate.

HXDFL335

HXDFL342
HXDFL334

2. Remove the mounting screws of 2. Remove the cover with a flat blade
(2) screwdriver.
the rear combination light with a
flat blade screwdriver.

(1)

HXDFL1017

3. To replace the rear combination

light, remove it from the bulb holder
and install the new bulb.

(1) Stop/Tail light

(2) Rear turn signal light
6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
42

G270C01L-GAT
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT
LIGHT
4Door
1. Open the trunk lid.

HXDFL332
HXDFL341B

Back up light 3. Disconnect the power cord.

HXDFL341A

2. Remove the plastic cover with a

flat blade screwdriver.

Rear Fog light

HXDFL333

3. To replace the rear combination

HTB284
light, remove it from the bulb holder
and install the new bulb. 4. Replace with a new bulb.
 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
6
43

5Door G270E01A-GAT
SIDE REPEATER (If installed)
1. Open the tail gate.

HXDFL343

3. Disconnect the power cord.

G270E01A
HXDFL341
1. Push the cover toward the front of
2. Remove the luggage compartment vehicle and remove it.
light cover on the right side pack-
age tray panel with pushing it.

HTB284

4. Replace with a new bulb.

HTB277

2. Disconnect the power cord.

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
44

G270G01E-GAT G270H01E-GAT
INTERIOR LIGHT Map Light (If installed)
Room Light

Screwdriver
HTB278

3. Replace with a new bulb.

B460D02E

HXDFL1020 1. Remove the plastic cover with a

1. Remove the plastic cover with a flat blade screwdriver.
flat blade screwdriver.

G270H01E

HXDFL1021
2. Replace with a new bulb.
2. Replace with a new bulb.
 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
6
BULB WATTAGE 45

G280A05E-GAT

4 DOOR 5 DOOR
1 2 6 8 9 8 13 9

3 4 5 7 11 12 13 10 12 11 10
G280A03E

No. Part Name Wattage Socket type No. Part Name Wattage Socket type
1 Head Light (High beam) 55 P14,5s 4 Door 21 BA 15s
8 High mounted rear stop light
PX 26d/ 5 Door 2,6(LED) -
2 Head Light (Low beam) / Front Position Light 55/5
W2.1X9.5d 9 Luggage compartment light 5 S8.5/8.5
3 Front Fog Light (If installed) 51 P22d 10 License plate light 5 S8.5/8.5
4 Front Turn Signal Light 21 BA15s 11 Rear fog light (If installed) 21 BA 15s
5 Side Repeater (If installed) 5 W2.1X9.5d Turn signal light 21 BAY 15d
12 Rear combination light
Map Light 10 W2.1×9.5D Stop/tail light 21/5 BA 15s
6 Interior
Room Light 10 S8.5/8.5 4 Door 16 W2.1×9.5D
13 Back -up light
7 Door Edge Warning Light 5 W2.1X9.5d 5 Door 27 BA 15s
6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
46 FUSE PANEL DESCRIPTION

G200B01E-GAT
Engine Compartment
(Gasoline Engine)

FUSE
DESCRIPTION PROTECTED COMPONENTS
RATING
BATT 120A Generator
BATT 50A Fusible link (P/WDW), Tail lamp relay, Power connector
COND 20A Condenser fan relay.1
RAD 20A Radiator fan relay
FUSIBLE
ECU 20A Generator, Engine control relay, Fuel pump relay, PCM
LINK
IGN 40A Ignition switch, Start relay
ABS.1 30A ABS control (Motor)
ABS.2 30A ABS control (Solenoid)
BLOWER 30A Blower relay
INJ. 15A Injectors
SNSR 10A PCM, Heated oxygen sensor, SMATRA, Heater relay, Glow plug relay
DRL 15A DRL control
H/LP WASHER 20A Head lamp washer
FUSE F/FOG 15A Front fog lamp relay
ECU 10A Siren, PCM
HORN & A/C 15A A/C relay, Horn relay
H/LP (HI) 15A Head lamp (Hight)
H/LP (LO) 15A Head lamp (Low)

G280B01E

NOTE:
Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle. It is accurate at the time of
printing. When you inspect the fuse box on your vehicle, refer to the fuse box label.
 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
6
47

G200C01E-GAT
(Diesel Engine)

FUSE
DESCRIPTION PROTECTED COMPONENTS
RATING
BATT 120A Generator
BATT 50A Fusible link (P/WDW), Tail lamp relay, Power connector
COND 30A Condenser fan relay.1
RAD 30A Radiator fan relay
ECU 30A Generator, Engine control relay, Fuel pump relay, PCM
IGN 40A Ignition switch, Start relay
FUSIBLE
ABS.1 30A ABS control (Motor)
LINK
ABS.2 30A ABS control (Solenoid)
BLOWER 30A Blower relay
GLOW PLUG 80A Grow plug relay
HEATER #1 60A Heater relay #1
HEATER #2 30A Heater relay #2
FUEL FILTER 30A Fuel filter relay
INJ. 15A Injectors
SNSR 10A PCM, Heated oxygen sensor, SMATRA, Heater relay, Glow plug relay
DRL 15A DRL control
H/LP WASHER 20A Head lamp washer
FUSE F/FOG 15A Front fog lamp relay
ECU 10A Siren, PCM
HORN & A/C 15A A/C relay, Horn relay
H/LP (HI) 15A Head lamp (Hight)
H/LP (LO) 15A Head lamp (Low)

G280C01E
6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
48

G200D01E-GAT
FUSE
Inner Panel DESCRIPTION
RATING
PROTECTED COMPONENTS

T/SIG 10A Turn signal lamps, Back-up lamp

CLUSTER 10A Pre-excitation resistor, Instrument cluster (IND)
A/BAG 15A SRS control
HAZARD 10A Hazard relay, Hazard lamps
A/C SW 10A A/C Control
TAIL-RH 10A Short connector, Illumination lamps, Tail lamp (RH), Head lamp washer
TAIL-LH 10A Tail lamp (LH), Exterior lamps
START 10A B/Alarm relay
AUDIO 10A Digital clock, Power outside mirror & mirror folding, Audio
ECU 10A Cruise control, PCM, Vehicle speed sensor, Ignition coil
ABS 10A ABS control
A/BAG IND 10A Instrument cluster (Air bag IND)
FUSE RR HTR 30A Defogger relay
AMP 20A Power antenna
S/ROOF 15A Power door lock control, Sunroof
STOP 15A Stop lamps, Power window, Power outside mirror folding
HTD MIR 10A Rear window & outside mirror defogger, A/C control
C/LIGHT 15A Cigarette lighter, Power outlet
RR FOG 10A Rear fog lamps
IGN 10A Head lamp, Head lamp washer, Fuel filter heating
R/WIPER 15A Rear wiper & washer
F/WIPER 20A Front wiper & washer
S/HTR 20A Seat warmer
A/CON 10A Blower & A/C control, ETACM, Sunroof controller, Electronic chrome mirror
Door lamps, Instrument cluster, Data link connector, Multipurpose check
ROOM LP 15A
connector, Room lamps, ETACM, Audio, Power connector
FUSIBLE
P/WINDOW 30A Power window
LINK
G280D01E
 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

Emission Control System ............................................ 7-2

Catalytic Converter ...................................................... 7-3
EGR System ................................................................ 7-4

7 7
7 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS
2 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

H010A01A-GAT H010B01A-AAT are drawn into the induction system

(If installed) 1. Crankcase Emission Control through the purge control solenoid
Your Hyundai is equipped with an System valve.
emission control system to meet all The positive crankcase ventilation
requirements of the Emission prohibi- system is employed to prevent air Purge Control Solenoid Valve
tion rules of your province. pollution caused by blow-by gases (PCSV)
There are three emission control sys- being emitted from the crankcase. The purge control solenoid valve is
tems which are as follows. This system supplies fresh filtered air controlled by the Engine Control Mod-
to the crankcase through the air in- ule (ECM); when the engine coolant
(1) Crankcase emission control sys- take hose. Inside the crankcase, the temperature is low during idling, the
tem fresh air mixes with blow-by gases, PCSV closes so that evaporated fuel
(2) Evaporative emission control sys- then passes through the PCV valve is not taken into the engine. After the
tem into the induction system. engine warms-up during ordinary driv-
(3) Exhaust emission control system ing, the PCSV opens so as to intro-
duce evaporated fuel to the engine.
In order to assure the proper function
H010C02E-GAT
of the emission control systems, it is
2. Evaporative Emission
recommended that you have your car
inspected and maintained by an au- Control System
H010D01A-AAT
thorized Hyundai dealer in accordance The Evaporative Emission Control 3. Exhaust Emission Control
with the maintenance schedule in this System is designed to prevent fuel System
manual. vapors from escaping into the atmo-
sphere. The Exhaust Emission Control Sys-
tem is a highly effective system which
Canister controls exhaust emissions while
While the engine is inoperative, fuel maintaining good vehicle performance.
vapors generated inside the fuel tank
are absorbed and stored in the canis-
ter. When the engine is running, the
fuel vapors absorbed in the canister
 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS
7
CATALYTIC CONVERTER 3

H020A01A-GAT H020B01A-GAT o Your Hyundai should not be either

(If installed) About the Catalytic Converter pushed or pulled to get it started.
; For a gasoline engine Exhaust gases passing through the This can cause the catalytic con-
catalytic converter cause it to operate verter to overload.
at very high temperatures. As a re- o Take care not to stop your Hyundai
sult, the introduction of large amounts over any combustible material such
of unburned gasoline may cause it to as grass, paper, leaves or rags. As
overheat and create a fire hazard. these materials could come in con-
This can be avoided by observing the tact with the catalytic converter and
following: could cause a fire.
o Do not touch the catalytic con-
o Use unleaded fuel only. verter or any other part of the ex-
o Maintain your engine in good con- haust system while the engine is
dition. Extremely high converter running as it is very hot and could
Catalytic Converter HXDFL1032
temperatures can result from im- result in burns.
The catalytic converter is part of the proper operation of the electrical, o Remember that your Hyundai
exhaust emission control system. Its ignition or fuel injection systems. dealer is your best source of assis-
purpose is to remove certain engine o If your engine stalls, pings, knocks, tance.
emission products from the engine's or is hard to start, take your car to
exhaust. It looks something like a your Hyundai dealer as soon as
muffler and is located underneath the possible and have the difficulty
car in the exhaust system. corrected.
H020D01S-GAT
o Avoid driving with a very low fuel
; For a diesel engine level. If your run out of gasoline, it
could cause the engine to misfire
All Hyundai vehicles are equipped and result in excessive loading of
with oxidation type catalytic converter the catalytic converter.
to reduce the carbon monoxide, hy- o Avoid idling the engine for periods
drocarbons and particulate contained longer than 10 minutes.
in the exhaust gas.
7 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS
4 EGR SYSTEM

H020C01S-GAT
; For a diesel engine
This system helps control oxides of
nitrogen by recirculating a part of the
exhaust gas into the engine.
 CONSUMER INFORMATION

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............................ 8-2

Engine Number ............................................................ 8-2
Recommended Inflation Pressures ............................. 8-3
Snow Tires ................................................................... 8-4
Tire Chains ................................................................... 8-4
Tire Rotation ................................................................ 8-5
Tire Balancing .............................................................. 8-5

8
Tire Traction ................................................................. 8-5
When to Replace Tires ................................................ 8-5
Spare Tire and Tools ................................................... 8-6

8
8 CONSUMER INFORMATION
2 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER (VIN)
I010A02A-GAT I010B01A-GAT
Diesel engine
Engine Number
Gasoline engine (1.6 DOHC)

I010B01B
HXDFL010-1
The engine number is stamped on
The vehicle identification number I010B02E
the engine block as shown in the
(VIN) is the number used in register- Gasoline engine (1.8/2.0 DOHC) drawing.
ing your car and in all legal matters
pertaining to its ownership, etc.
It can be found on the identification
plate attached to the engine side of
the firewall between the engine and
driver compartment.

SSA8010B
 CONSUMER INFORMATION
8
TIRE 3

I020A01A-AAT I030A03E-GAT
PRESSURE, kPa (PSI)
TIRE INFORMATION RECOMMENDED INFLATION RIM
TIRE SIZE NORMAL LOAD MAXIMUM LOAD
The tires supplied on your new PRESSURES SIZE
FRONT REAR FRONT REAR
Hyundai are chosen to provide the
5.5Jx15 185/65R15 210(30) 210(30) 230(33) 230(33)
best performance for normal driving.
5.5Jx15 195/60R15 210(30) 210(30) 230(33) 230(33)

These pressures were chosen to pro-

vide the most satisfactory combina-
tion of ride comfort, tire wear and
stability under normal conditions. Tire
pressures should be checked at least
monthly. Proper tire inflation pres-
sures should be maintained for these
I030A01E
reasons:
The tire label located on the driver's o Lower-than-recommended tire
side center pillar outer panel gives pressures cause uneven tread wear
the tire pressures recommended for and poor handling.
your vehicle. o Higher-than-recommended tire
pressures increase the chance of
damage from impacts and cause
uneven tread wear.
8 CONSUMER INFORMATION
4

I040A01S-GAT I050A02E-GAT
SNOW TIRES TIRE CHAINS
! CAUTION: If you equip your car with snow tires, Tire chains, if necessary should be
Always observe the following: they should be the same size and installed on the front wheels. Be sure
have the same load capacity as the that the chains are installed in accor-
o Check pressures when the tires original tires. Snow tires should be dance with the manufacturer's instruc-
are cold. That is, after the car installed on all four wheels; other- tions.
has been parked for at least three wise, poor handling may result. To minimize tire and chain wear, do
hours and hasn't been driven Snow tires should carry 28 kPa (4 not continue to use tire chains when
more than 1.6 km or one mile psi) more air pressure than the pres- they are no longer needed.
since starting up. sure recommended for the standard
o Check the pressure of your spare tires on the tire label on, or up to the
tire each time you check the
pressure of other tires.
maximum pressure shown on the tire
sidewall whichever is less.
! WARNING:
Do not drive faster than 120 km/h (75 o When driving on roads covered
mph) when your car is equipped with with snow or ice, drive at less
snow tires. than 30 km/h (20 mph).
o Use the SAE "S" class or wire &
plastic chains.
o If you have noise caused by
chains contacting the body, re-
tighten the chain to avoid con-
tact with the vehicle body.
o To prevent body damage, re-
tighten the chains after driving
0.5 ~ 1 km.
 CONSUMER INFORMATION
8
5

I060A01A-GAT I070A01A-AAT I090A01HP-GAT

TIRE ROTATION TIRE BALANCING WHEN TO REPLACE TIRES
A tire that is out of balance may affect 1.6 mm (0.06 in.)
handling and tire wear. The tires on
your Hyundai were balanced before
the car was delivered but may need
balancing again during the years you
own the car.
Whenever a tire is dismounted for
repair, it should be rebalanced before Wear indicator
being reinstalled on the car.

Spare tire HA1409 HXDFL248

Tires should be rotated every 10,000 The original tires on your car have
km (6,000 miles). If you notice that I080A01A-AAT tread wear indicators. The tread wear
tires are wearing unevenly between TIRE TRACTION indicators appear when the tread
rotations, have the car checked by a Tire traction can be reduced if you depth is 1.6 mm (0.06 in.). The tire
Hyundai dealer so the cause may be drive on worn tires, tires that are should be replaced when these ap-
corrected. improperly inflated or on slippery road pear as a solid bar across two or
After rotating, adjust the tire pres- surfaces. Tires should be replaced more grooves of the tread. Always
sures and be sure to check wheel nut when tread wear indicators appear. replace your tires with those of the
torque. To reduce the possibility of losing recommended size. If you change
control, slow down whenever there is wheels, the new wheel's rim width
and offset must meet Hyundai speci-
! WARNING:
rain, snow or ice on the road.
fication.
Do not mix bias-ply and radial-ply
tires under any circumstances. This
may cause dangerous handling
characteristics.
8 CONSUMER INFORMATION
6 SPARE TIRE AND TOOLS

I100A01FC-GAT
When replacing the tires, be sure
! WARNING: to equip all four tires with the tire
o Driving on worn-out tires is dan- and wheel of the same size, type,
gerous! Worn-out tires can cause tread, brand and load-carrying ca-
loss of braking effectiveness, pacity. If you nevertheless decide
steering control and traction. to equip your vehicle with any
When replacing tires, never mix tire/wheel combination not rec-
radial and bias-ply tires on the ommended by Hyundai for off-
same car. If you replace radial road driving, you should not use
tires with bias-ply tires, they must these tires for highway driving.
be installed in sets of four.
HXD091-1
o Your vehicle is equipped with
tires designed to provide for safe Your Hyundai is delivered with the
ride and handling capability. following:
Do not use a size and type of tire
and wheel that is different from Spare tire and wheel
the one that is originally installed Wheel nut wrench, Wrench bar, Span-
on your vehicle. It can affect the ner, Screw driver
safety and performance of your Jack
vehicle, which could lead to han-
dling failure or rollover and seri-
ous injury.
 VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

Measurement ................................................................ 9-2

Engine ........................................................................... 9-3
Lubrication Chart .......................................................... 9-4

9 9
9 VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS
2

J010A02E-GAT J030A02E-GAT
MEASUREMENT mm (in.) TIRE Kpa(psi)
4 Door 5 Door Tire Size Pressure
Overall length 4525 (178.1) 4520 (177.9) Standard 185/65 R15 210 (30)
Overall width 1725 (67.9) 1720 (67.7) Option 195/60 R15 210 (30)
Overall height (unladen) 1425 (56.1)
Wheel base 2610 (102.8)
J040A03E-GAT
Wheel tread Front 1485 (58.5) ELECTRICAL
Rear 1475 (58.1)
Item GASOLINE DIESEL
Battery MF45AH, MF60AH(12V) CMF 80 AH
J020A01E-GAT
Generator 90A (13.5V) 120A (12V)
POWER STEERING
Type Rack and pinion
Wheel free play 0 ~ 30 mm (0 ~ 1.18 in.) J050A01E-AAT

Rack stroke 144 mm (5.67 in.) BRAKE

Oil pump type Vane type Type Dual hydraulic with brake booster
Front brake type Ventilated disc
J060A01S-GAT Rear brake type Solid disc (With ABS)
FUEL SYSTEM Drum (Without ABS)
Fuel tank Liter US.gal Imp.gal Parking brake Cable
capacity 55 14.5 12
 VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS
9
ENGINE 3

J070A06E-GAT

ITEMS GASOLINE DIESEL

Engine Type 1.6/1.8/2.0 4Cylinder in-line DOHC 2.0 4Cylinder in-line SOHC
Idle Speed (RPM) A/CON OFF 700 ± 100 (1.6L), 700 ± 100 (1.8/2.0 L) 750 ± 100
A/CON ON 750 ± 100 (1.6L), 750 ± 100 (1.8/2.0 L) 800 ± 100
Spark Plug NGK BKR5ES-11 -
Unleaded
CHAMPION RC10YC4 -
NGK BKR5ES -
Leaded
CHAMPION RC10YC -
Spark Plug Gap Unleaded 1.0 ~ 1.1 mm (0.039 ~ 0.043 in.) -
Leaded 0.7 ~ 0.8 mm (0.028 ~ 0.032 in.) -
Intake 0.17 ~ 0.23 mm (0.0067 ~ 0.0091 in.) (1.8/2.0 DOHC) AUTO LASH
For adjusting
Valve Clearance Exhaust 0.25 ~ 0.31 mm (0.0098 ~ 0.0122 in.) (1.8/2.0 DOHC) (1.6 DOHC / Diesel)
(Cold engine : 20±5°C) Intake 0.12 ~ 0.28 mm (0.0047 ~ 0.011 in.) (1.8/2.0 DOHC) AUTO LASH
For checking
Exhaust 0.20 ~ 0.38 mm (0.0079 ~ 0.015 in.) (1.8/2.0 DOHC) (1.6 DOHC / Diesel)
Ignition Timing BTDC 9° ± 5° (1.6L), BTDC 6° ± 5° (1.8L), BTDC 8° ± 5° (2.0L) -
Firing Order 1-3-4-2
9 VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS
4 LUBRICATION CHART

J080A06E-GAT

Item Oil & Grease Standard Q'ty (liter)

Engine Oil (Gasoline) API SJ, SL SAE 5W-20, 5W-30 1.6 DOHC - 3.3 (With oil filter)
or ABOVE, SAE 10W-30 (ABOVE -18°C) (3.5 us.qts., 2.9 Imp.qts)
ILSAC GF-3 SAE 15W-40 (ABOVE -13°C) 1.8/2.0 DOHC - 4.0 (With oil filter)
or ABOVE SAE 20W-50 (ABOVE -7°C) (4.2 us.qts., 3.5 Imp.qts)
Engine Oil (Diesel) API CF-4 SAE 30 (0°C ~ 40°C) 2.0 SOHC - 5.9 (With oil filter)
or ABOVE, SAE 20W-40 (ABOVE -10°C) (6.3 us.qts., 5.2 Imp.qts)
ACEA B4 SAE 15W-40 (ABOVE -15°C)
or ABOVE SAE 10W-30 (-20°C ~ 40°C)
SAE 5W-30 (-25°C ~ 10°C)
SAE 0W-30 (BELOW 10°C) *1, *2
*1. Restricted to driving condition and area
*2. Not recommended for sustained high speed vehicle operation
Engine Oil Consumption Normal driving condition MAX. 1L / 1,500 Km
Severe driving condition MAX. 1L / 1,000 Km
Transaxle Manual HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS MTF 75W/85 (API GL-4) 2.15 (2.3 us. qts., 1.86 Imp. qts)
HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III, DIAMOND ATF SP III, 6.1 (6.4 us. qts., 5.3 Imp.qts) (1.6 DOHC)
Auto
SK ATF SP III or other brands approved by Hyundai Motor Co., 7.8 (8.2 us. qts., 6.8 Imp.qts) (1.8/2.0 DOHC)
Power Steering PSF-3 As required
Brake Fluid DOT 3, DOT 4 or equivalent As required
Gasoline : 5.5(1.6 DOHC), 6(1.8/2.0 DOHC)
Coolant Ethylene glycol base for aluminum radiator
Diesel : 8.1
INDEX

10
10
10 INDEX
2

A C
Airbag ........................................................................ 1-37 Care of Cassette Tapes ......................................... 1-135
Air Cleaner Filter ....................................................... 6-19 Care of Disc ............................................................ 1-134
Air Conditioning Cassette Tape Player Operation (H240, H280/H290)
Care ....................................................................... 6-27 .................................................................. 1-112, 1-126
Operation ............................................................... 1-94 Catalytic Converter ...................................................... 7-3
Switch ..................................................................... 1-94 CD Auto Changer (H260, H280/H290) .......... 1-120, 1-131
Air Filter ........................................................ 1-103, 6-28 Child Restraint System .............................................. 1-26
Antenna ................................................................... 1-137 Cigarette Lighter ........................................................ 1-65
Ashtray ...................................................................... 1-66 Clock ......................................................................... 1-64
Audio Fault Code .................................................... 1-113 Clutch
Automatic Heating and Cooling Control System ...... 1-96 Checking the cluch fluid ......................................... 6-26
Pedal freeplay ........................................................ 6-29
B Combination Light
Battery ............................................................. 2-20, 6-32 Daytime running light ............................................. 1-59
Brake Headlight flasher .................................................... 1-59
Anti-lock system ..................................................... 2-14 Headlight switch ..................................................... 1-58
Checking the brakes .............................................. 6-24 High-beam switch .................................................. 1-59
Fluid ....................................................................... 6-25 Lane change signal ................................................ 1-58
Pedal clearance ..................................................... 6-30 Turn signal operation ............................................. 1-58
Pedal freeplay ........................................................ 6-29 Compact Disc Player Operation (H260, H280/H290)
Practices ................................................................ 2-16 ................................................................. 1-117, 1-128
Breaking-In your New Hyundai ................................... 1-3 Cooling Fans ............................................................. 6-34
Bulbs Replacement ................................................... 6-38 Corrosion protection
Bulbs Wattage ........................................................... 6-45 Cleaning the interior ................................................. 4-5
Protecting your Hyundai from corrosion .................. 4-2
Washing and waxing ................................................ 4-4
 INDEX
10
3

D F
Door Folding Rear Seatbacks ........................................... 1-17
Central door locks .................................................... 1-9 Front Fog Light ......................................................... 1-60
Door locks ................................................................ 1-7 Front Seats
Locking, unlocking front doors with a key ............... 1-8 Adjustable front seats ............................................ 1-14
Drink Holder .............................................................. 1-67 Adjustable headrests.............................................. 1-16
Drive Belts ................................................................ 6-30 Adjusting seat forward and rearward ..................... 1-15
Driving Adjusting seatback angle ....................................... 1-15
Economical driving ................................................. 2-17 Lumbar support control .......................................... 1-16
Smooth cornering ................................................... 2-19 Seat cushion height adjustment ............................ 1-17
Winter driving ......................................................... 2-19 Seat warmer ........................................................... 1-19
Fuel
E Capacity ................................................................... 9-2
Emission Control System ........................................... 7-2 Gauge .................................................................... 1-15
Engine Recommendations ................................................... 1-2
Before starting the engine ....................................... 2-3 Fuel Filler Lid
Compartment ........................................................... 6-2 Remote release ...................................................... 1-80
Coolant ................................................................... 6-14 Fuses ........................................................................ 6-31
Coolant temperature gauge ................................... 1-53 Fuse Panel description ............................................. 6-46
If the engine overheats ............................................ 3-4
Number .................................................................... 8-2 G
Oil ............................................................................. 6-8 General Checks .......................................................... 6-7
Starting ..................................................................... 2-5 Glove Box ................................................................. 1-74
Engine Exhaust Can Be Dangerous ........................... 2-2
10 INDEX
4

H K
Hazard Warning System ........................................... 1-64 Key .............................................................................. 1-5
Headlight Aiming Adjustment .................................... 6-36 If you lose your keys ............................................. 3-13
Headlight Leveling Device System ........................... 1-69 Positions ................................................................... 2-4
Headlight Washer Switch .......................................... 1-62 Keyless Entry System .............................................. 1-12
Heating and cooling control ...................................... 1-87
Heating and Ventilation ............................................. 1-88 L
Air flow control ....................................................... 1-88 Lubrication Chart ......................................................... 9-4
Air intake control .................................................... 1-90 Luggage Net ............................................................. 1-82
Bi-level heating ....................................................... 1-92
Defrost/Defogging .................................................. 1-92 M
Fan speed control .................................................. 1-91 Maintenance Intervals
Temperature control ............................................... 1-91 Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ......... 5-8
High-Mounted Rear Stop Light ................................. 1-78 Maintenance under severe usage conditions .......... 5-7
Hood Release ............................................................ 1-78 Scheduled maintenance ........................................... 5-4
Horn1-83 Service requirements ............................................... 5-2
Mirrors
I Outside rearview mirror ......................................... 1-74
If your car must be towed ......................................... 3-11 Outside rearview mirror heater .............................. 1-76
Ignition Switch ............................................................. 2-3 Folding the outside rearview mirrors ....................... 1-76
Immobilizer System ..................................................... 1-5 Day/night inside rearview ........................................ 1-76
Instrument Cluster and Indicator ............................... 1-44
Instrument Panel Light Control (RHEOSTAT) ............ 1-65 O
Interior Light Odometer/ Trip Odometer ........................................ 1-55
Interior light ............................................................ 1-73
Map light ................................................................ 1-72 P
Parking Brake ........................................................... 1-67
J Power Outlet ............................................................. 1-66
Jump Starting .............................................................. 3-3 Power Steering Fluid Level ....................................... 6-34
Power Windows ......................................................... 1-13
 INDEX
10
5

R Stereo Radio Operation (H210, H240, H260, H280/H290)

Rear Fog Light Switch ............................................... 1-62 ............................................ 1-106, 1-109, 1-114, 1-123
Rear Seat .................................................................. 1-17 Stereo Sound System ............................................. 1-104
Rear Window Defroster Switch .................................. 1-63 Sun Visor ................................................................... 1-77
Replacement of Light Bulbs ...................................... 6-38 Sunroof ...................................................................... 1-70
Sunshade ................................................................... 1-70
S
Seat T
Front seat ............................................................... 1-14 Tachometer ............................................................... 1-54
Rear seat ............................................................... 1-17 Theft-Alarm system ................................................... 1-10
Seat Warmer .......................................................... 1-19 Ticket Holder ............................................................. 1-64
Seatback holder ..................................................... 1-69 Tires
Seatback pocket .................................................... 1-68 Balancing .................................................................. 8-5
Seat Belts Chains ...................................................................... 8-4
3-Point system ....................................................... 1-23 If you have a flat tire ............................................... 3-6
2-Point static type .................................................. 1-24 Information ............................................................... 8-2
Adjustable height.................................................... 1-22 Pressure ................................................................... 8-3
Adjusting your seat belt ......................................... 1-23 Replacement ............................................................ 8-5
Care of seat belts .................................................. 1-22 Rotation .................................................................... 8-5
Precautions ............................................................ 1-20 Snow tires ................................................................ 8-4
Pre-tensioner seat belt ........................................... 1-34 Spare tire ................................................................. 3-6
Spark Plugs ............................................................... 6-17 Traction .................................................................... 8-5
Spare Tire and Tools .................................................. 8-6 Towing
Spectacle case .......................................................... 1-73 Emergency ............................................................. 3-12
Speedometer ............................................................. 1-54 If your car must be towed ..................................... 3-11
Starting ........................................................................ 2-5 Trailer or Vehicle towing ........................................... 2-22
Steering Wheel Freeplay .......................................... 6-29 Day/night inside rearview ....................................... 1-77
Steering Wheel Tilt Lever .......................................... 1-83 Traction Control System (TCS) ................................. 2-15
10 INDEX
6

Transaxle
Automatic ................................................................. 2-9
Automatic transaxle fluid checking ........................ 6-22
Manual ..................................................................... 2-7
Manual transaxle Oil checking ............................... 6-21
Trip Computer ........................................................... 1-56
Trip Odometer ........................................................... 1-55
Trunk Lid/Tail gate ..................................................... 1-81

V
Vehicle Identification Number ..................................... 8-2

W
Warning And Indicator Light ..................................... 1-48
Windshield Wiper and Washer ................................. 1-60
Adjustable intermittent wiper operation .................. 1-60
Rear window wiper and washer ............................ 1-61
Windshield Wiper Blades .......................................... 6-20
Winter Driving ........................................................... 2-19